WO2016092953A1 - Device - Google Patents
Device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2016092953A1 WO2016092953A1 PCT/JP2015/079223 JP2015079223W WO2016092953A1 WO 2016092953 A1 WO2016092953 A1 WO 2016092953A1 JP 2015079223 W JP2015079223 W JP 2015079223W WO 2016092953 A1 WO2016092953 A1 WO 2016092953A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- band
- uplink
- mode
- subframe
- downlink
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W28/00—Network traffic management; Network resource management
- H04W28/02—Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
- H04W28/04—Error control
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W28/00—Network traffic management; Network resource management
- H04W28/02—Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
- H04W28/06—Optimizing the usage of the radio link, e.g. header compression, information sizing, discarding information
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
Definitions
- This disclosure relates to an apparatus.
- LTE Long Term Evolution
- TDD Time Division Duplex
- the UL / DL configuration ratio in a radio frame can be changed by dynamically changing the UL / DL configuration according to traffic. That is, in TDD, the amount of radio resources for DL and the amount of radio resources for UL can be flexibly adjusted.
- FDD Frequency Division Duplex
- FDD Time Division Duplex
- the amount of radio resources for DL and the amount of radio resources for UL cannot be flexibly adjusted.
- FDD it is possible to use more DL bands and fewer UL bands by carrier aggregation, but as a result, the usage rate of radio resources in the UL band decreases and radio resources are used efficiently. I can't say that.
- Patent Document 1 discloses a technique for using an FDD UL band in a TDD mode.
- the FDD UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication may not be performed well in the UL band.
- the switching unit for switching the operation mode for the uplink band, and a subframe for transmitting ACK (Acknowledgement) / NACK (Negative Acknowledgement) for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode.
- a control unit that notifies the terminal device of information.
- the processor uses a first mode in which the FDD uplink band is used for the uplink, and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division. Switching the operation mode for the uplink band between the mode and the information on the subframe for transmitting the ACK / NACK for the downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode, Informing the terminal device.
- a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division
- An apparatus includes a control unit that performs processing and performs processing for downlink reception and uplink transmission in the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode.
- the acquisition unit acquires information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode, and the control unit acquires the second operation mode when the operation mode is the second mode. In the mode, processing for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data is performed based on the information on the subframe.
- FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
- FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the case where a base station is a base station of a macrocell. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the case where a base station is a base station of a small cell.
- UL transmission timing adjustment (a) Timing Advance (TA)
- TA Timing Advance
- a base station for example, eNB (evolved Node B)
- a terminal device for example, UE (User Equipment)
- the UL transmission timing of each of the plurality of terminal devices is adjusted so that the reception timings of the UL signals from the plurality of terminal devices are synchronized.
- the base station notifies the terminal device of a timing advance (TA) command, and the terminal device adjusts the UL transmission timing based on the TA command.
- TA timing advance
- (A-1) Initial value of TA
- the terminal device includes a DL reception timing, based on the N TA, to adjust the UL transmission timing.
- TA i.e., the difference of the UL transmission timing and DL reception timing
- N TA * T S N TA * T S.
- T S is a 1 / 30.72 microseconds (us).
- TDD Time Division Duplex
- TA is (N TA +624) * T S.
- Offset of 624 * T S is for allowing the switch to DL transmission from UL reception at the base station.
- N TA can be said to be information indicating the TA.
- T A 0 to 63
- FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of TA in the FDD case.
- transmission / reception timings of a base station and a terminal device in the FDD case are shown.
- the DL transmission timing and the UL reception timing are synchronized.
- the DL frame timing and the UL frame timing are synchronized.
- the DL reception timing in the terminal device is later than the DL transmission timing in the base station, and the UL transmission timing in the terminal device is earlier than the UL reception timing in the base station.
- the UL transmission timing in the terminal device is earlier by TA91 than the DL reception timing in the terminal device.
- FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of TA in the TDD case.
- transmission / reception timings of the base station and the terminal device in the TDD case are shown.
- the DL reception timing in the terminal apparatus is later than the DL transmission timing in the base station, and the UL transmission timing in the terminal apparatus is earlier than the UL reception timing in the base station.
- the UL transmission timing in the terminal device is earlier by TA93 than the DL reception timing 95 in the terminal device.
- the terminal device it takes time 99 to switch from DL reception to UL transmission.
- the terminal device can use up to five component carriers (CC) simultaneously by carrier aggregation.
- the terminal apparatus adjusts the UL transmission timing for PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) / PUSCH (Physical Uplink Shared Channel) / SRS (Sounding Reference Signal) of the primary cell based on the DL reception timing and the information indicating TA. To do.
- a terminal device adjusts UL transmission timing about PUSCH / SRS of a secondary cell based on DL reception timing and information indicating TA.
- a common TA is used for the plurality of CCs.
- the plurality of CCs belong to the same timing advance group (TAG), and the TA is a TA of this TAG.
- the terminal device manages TAs of a plurality of TAGs.
- the terminal device adjusts the UL transmission timing for a CC belonging to a certain TAG based on the TA of the certain TAG.
- the TA command MAC (Medium Access Control) control element includes a 2-bit TAG ID and a 6-bit TA command.
- FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK in FDD-LTE.
- a subframe of the FDD DL band and a subframe of the FDD UL band are shown.
- ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 4.
- ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 5.
- FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the TDD UL / DL configuration.
- configurations 0 to 6 are shown as UL / DL configurations of TDD.
- the number and arrangement of UL subframes and DL subframes differ depending on the configuration.
- Configurations 0 to 6 are the same as those shown in Table 4.2.2 included in 3GPP TS 36.211.
- FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of the system 1 according to the present embodiment.
- the system 1 includes a base station 100 and a terminal device 200.
- Base station 100 is a base station of a mobile communication system (or cellular system).
- the mobile communication system is a system that complies with LTE, LTE-Advanced, or a communication standard equivalent thereto.
- the base station 100 supports FDD and performs radio communication with a terminal device (located in the cell 101) using the DL band and UL band of the FDD.
- the UL band is a UL component carrier (CC)
- the DL band is a DL CC.
- the base station 100 determines whether the UL band is between the first mode in which the UL band is used for UL and the second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. Switch the operation mode.
- the base station 100 transmits a DL signal to the terminal device in the DL band and receives a UL signal from the terminal device in the UL band.
- the base station 100 transmits a DL signal to the terminal device in the DL band, and further transmits the DL signal to the terminal device in a DL subframe in the UL band.
- DL signal is transmitted.
- the base station 100 receives the UL signal from the terminal device in the UL subframe in the UL band.
- Terminal device 200 is a terminal device that can communicate in the mobile communication system (or cellular system).
- the base station 100 supports the second mode.
- the terminal device 200 receives a DL signal from the base station 100 in the DL band and transmits a UL signal to the base station 100 in the UL band. To do.
- the terminal apparatus 200 receives a DL signal from the base station 100 in the DL band, and further, in the UL band, the base station 100 in a DL subframe.
- the DL signal from is received.
- the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal to the base station 100 in the UL band in the UL subframe.
- the base station 100 is a macro cell base station. That is, the cell 101 is a macro cell.
- the cell 101 is a macro cell.
- FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where the base station 100 is a macro cell base station.
- a base station 100 and a terminal device 200 are shown.
- the base station 100 is a macro cell base station
- the cell 101 is a macro cell overlapping the small cell 21.
- the terminal device 200 can perform wireless communication with the base station 20 of the small cell 21.
- the base station 100 may be a small cell base station. That is, the cell 101 may be a small cell.
- the cell 101 may be a small cell.
- FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where the base station 100 is a small cell base station.
- a base station 100 and a terminal device 200 are shown.
- the base station 100 is a small cell base station
- the cell 101 is a small cell overlapping the macro cell 31.
- the terminal device 200 can perform wireless communication with the base station 30 of the macro cell 31.
- FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary configuration of the base station 100 according to the embodiment of the present disclosure.
- the base station 100 includes an antenna unit 110, a wireless communication unit 120, a network communication unit 130, a storage unit 140, and a processing unit 150.
- Antenna unit 110 The antenna unit 110 radiates a signal output from the wireless communication unit 120 to the space as a radio wave. Further, the antenna unit 110 converts radio waves in space into a signal and outputs the signal to the wireless communication unit 120.
- the wireless communication unit 120 transmits and receives signals.
- the radio communication unit 120 transmits a DL signal to the terminal device and receives a UL signal from the terminal device.
- the network communication unit 130 transmits and receives information.
- the network communication unit 130 transmits information to other nodes and receives information from other nodes.
- the other nodes include other base stations and core network nodes.
- Storage unit 140 The storage unit 140 temporarily or permanently stores a program for operating the base station 100 and various data.
- Processing unit 150 provides various functions of the base station 100.
- the processing unit 150 includes a switching unit 151 and a control unit 153.
- the processing unit 150 may further include other components other than these components. That is, the processing unit 150 can perform operations other than the operations of these components.
- the switching unit 151 and the control unit 153 will be described in detail later.
- FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary configuration of the terminal device 200 according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
- the terminal device 200 includes an antenna unit 210, a wireless communication unit 220, a storage unit 230, and a processing unit 240.
- Antenna unit 210 The antenna unit 210 radiates the signal output from the wireless communication unit 220 to the space as a radio wave. Further, the antenna unit 210 converts a radio wave in the space into a signal and outputs the signal to the wireless communication unit 220.
- the wireless communication unit 220 transmits and receives signals.
- the radio communication unit 220 receives a DL signal from the base station and transmits a UL signal to the base station.
- an example of hardware included in the wireless communication unit 220 will be described with reference to FIG.
- FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of hardware included in the wireless communication unit 220 of the terminal device 200 according to the embodiment of the present disclosure.
- an FDD-DL reception circuit 221, an FDD-UL transmission circuit 223, and a TDD-DL reception circuit 225 included in the wireless communication unit 220 are illustrated.
- an antenna 211 included in the antenna unit 210 is also shown.
- the operation mode for the UL band is the first mode in which the UL band is used for UL
- the FDD-DL reception circuit 221 and the FDD-UL transmission circuit 223 are used.
- the operation mode is the second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division
- a TDD-DL reception circuit 225 is used. More specifically, the FDD-UL transmission circuit 223 and the TDD-DL reception circuit 225 are used in a time division manner.
- Storage unit 230 The storage unit 230 temporarily or permanently stores a program for operating the terminal device 200 and various data.
- the processing unit 240 provides various functions of the terminal device 200.
- the processing unit 240 includes an information acquisition unit 241 and a control unit 243.
- the processing unit 240 may further include other components other than these components. That is, the processing unit 240 can perform operations other than the operations of these components.
- the information acquisition unit 241 and the control unit 243 will be described in detail later.
- the FDD UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication may not be performed well in the UL band.
- the DL transmission timing for the UL band is delayed.
- the DL transmission timing for the FDD DL band may be different from the UL transmission timing adjusted based on the DL reception timing for the UL band. Therefore, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station may not be realized.
- a specific example of the DL transmission timing delay caused by switching will be described with reference to FIG.
- FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a delay in DL transmission timing caused by switching between UL and DL in the UL band.
- the transmission / reception timing in the base station in the first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- the transmission / reception timing in the base station is shown.
- DL transmission timing and UL reception timing are synchronized in the base station.
- the DL transmission timing for the UL band in the base station is higher than the DL transmission timing for the DL band. Also late.
- the DL reception timing for the UL band can be sent more than the DL reception timing for the DL band. Therefore, the UL transmission timing adjusted based on the DL reception timing for the DL band is different from the UL transmission timing adjusted based on the DL reception timing for the UL band. Therefore, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station may not be realized.
- the base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- the operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
- (A) Switching trigger For example, if DL traffic in the cell 101 is sufficiently larger than UL traffic and the number of terminal devices supporting the second mode is sufficient, the base station 100 (switching The unit 151) switches the operation mode for the UL band from the first mode to the second mode.
- (B) UL transmission timing before and after switching For example, the base station 100 does not change the UL transmission timing (in other words, UL frame timing) before and after switching the operation mode for the UL band. Thereby, for example, it is possible to further reduce the influence on a terminal device that does not support the second mode (hereinafter referred to as âlegacy terminalâ).
- legacy terminal a terminal device that does not support the second mode
- the DL transmission timing for the UL band is later than the DL transmission timing for the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band by the delay caused by the switching of the operation mode. Become. This point is as described with reference to FIG.
- the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits information indicating the switching of the operation mode between the first mode and the second mode (hereinafter, âmode switching informationâ). To the terminal device 200.
- the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information in the system information (System Information).
- the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may notify the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information by individual signaling to the terminal device 200.
- the individual signaling may be RRC (Radio Resource Control) signaling.
- the terminal device 200 (information acquisition unit 241) acquires the mode switching information.
- the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band when the operation mode is the first mode, and performs DL reception and UL in the UL band when the operation mode is the second mode. Send.
- the control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 performs processing for UL transmission in the UL band when the operation mode is the first mode, and when the operation mode is the second mode, Processing for DL reception and UL transmission in the UL band is performed.
- the base station 100 determines the first timing advance (TA) based on the DL reception timing for the DL band.
- TA timing advance
- An instruction and an instruction for the second TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band are given.
- the instruction for the first TA and the instruction for the second TA are instructions to the same terminal device 200 that supports the second mode.
- the terminal device 200 determines the UL reception based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA.
- the UL transmission timing for the band is adjusted.
- the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243), based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA, The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted.
- the second TA is longer than the first TA.
- specific examples of the first TA and the second TA will be described with reference to FIG.
- FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining examples of the first TA and the second TA.
- transmission / reception timings of the base station 100 and the terminal device 200 when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode are shown. Since the base station 100 requires time 41 for switching from UL to DL in the UL band, the DL transmission timing for the UL band is delayed from the DL transmission timing for the DL band. As a result, the terminal apparatus 200 can send the DL reception timing for the UL band more than the DL reception timing for the DL band. Therefore, the base station 100 (control unit 153) instructs the first TA 43 based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the second TA 45 based on the DL reception timing for the UL band.
- the second TA45 is longer than the first TA43.
- the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) adjusts the UL transmission timing in the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and information indicating the first TA 43. Or the terminal device 200 (control part 243) adjusts UL transmission timing in the said UL band based on the DL reception timing about the said UL band, and the information which shows 2nd TA45.
- the TA command includes a TA command for the first TA and a TA command for the second TA. That is, the base station 100 (control unit 153) issues an instruction for the first TA by notifying the TA command for the first TA, and by notifying the TA command for the second TA. And instructing the second TA.
- the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) generates information indicating the first TA based on the TA command for the first TA, and the TA command for the second TA. Based on the above, information indicating the second TA is generated.
- base station 100 (control section 153) notifies the TA command indicating T A1 for adjusting said first TA to the terminal apparatus 200. Furthermore, the base station 100 (control section 153) notifies the TA command indicating T A2 for adjusting the second TA to the terminal apparatus 200.
- the terminal device 200 calculates N TA1 for the first TA from T A1 . That is, the terminal device 200 generates N TA1 that is information indicating the first TA. Then, the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and NTAl .
- the terminal device 200 the T A2, to calculate the N TA2 for the second TA. That is, the terminal device 200 generates N TA2 that is information indicating the second TA. Then, the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and NTA2 .
- the terminal device 200 can appropriately adjust the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on either the DL reception timing for the DL band or the DL reception timing for the UL. Also, by adjusting the UL transmission timing in the UL band based on the DL reception timing in the UL band, not the DL reception timing in the DL band, which has a delay dispersion different from that of the UL band, it is possible to achieve higher accuracy. Timing adjustment is possible.
- the TA command for the first TA is a command for the first TAG
- the TA command for the second TA is different from the first TAG. This is a command for TAG.
- the base station 100 transmits a MAC control element including a TA command for the first TA and a TAG ID of the first TAG to the terminal device 200. Further, the base station 100 transmits a MAC control element including a TA command for the second TA and a TAG ID of the second TAG to the terminal device 200.
- the terminal device 200 can distinguish between the TA command for the first TA and the TA command for the second TA.
- (C-2) Notification of offset The base station 100 (control unit 153) gives an instruction for one of the first TA and the second TA in response to the notification of the TA command, and the first TA Even if an instruction is given for the other of the first TA and the second TA by notification of information indicating an offset between the first TA and the second TA (hereinafter referred to as âoffset informationâ) Good.
- the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) generates information indicating the one of the first TA and the second TA based on the TA command, and based on the information and the offset information Information indicating the other of the first TA and the second TA may be generated.
- One of the first TA and the second TA is the first TA, and the other of the first TA and the second TA is the second TA. Also good.
- the base station 100 is a TA command indicating T A1 for adjusting said first TA may notify the terminal device 200.
- the terminal device 200 may calculate N TA1 for the first TA from T A1 . That is, the terminal device 200 may generate N TA1 that is information indicating the first TA.
- the base station 100 (the control unit 153) is information (offset information) indicating an offset between the first TA and the second TA (for example, in system information or by signaling).
- a certain NTA_offset may be notified to the terminal device 200.
- the terminal device 200 may calculate N TA2 (for example, N TA1 + N TA_offset ) from N TA1 and N TA_offset . That is, the terminal device 200 may generate N TA2 that is information indicating the second TA.
- NTA_offset may be a predetermined value (for example, 624).
- the terminal apparatus 200 uses the first TA when the operation mode of the UL band is switched from the first mode to the second mode.
- the information indicating the second TA (for example, N TA2 ) may be generated as an initial value from the information indicating the second TA (for example, N TA1 ) and the offset information (for example, N TA_offset ). Thereafter, the terminal device 200 may generate (update) the information (for example, N TA2 ) indicating the second TA based on the second TA command.
- the terminal device 200 continuously obtains the second information from the information indicating the first TA (for example, N TA1 ) and the offset information (for example, N TA_offset ).
- the information indicating TA (for example, N TA2 ) may be generated.
- the base station 100 may notify the offset information in the system information.
- the base station 100 may notify the offset information by signaling.
- the base station 100 (the control unit 153) is not limited to the case where the operation mode is the second operation mode. Notification may be performed. That is, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) is not limited to the case where the operation mode is the second operation mode, and the base station 100 (the control unit 153) performs the operation for the second TA when the operation mode is the first mode.
- the above instructions may be given.
- the offset information may be stored in the terminal device 200 in advance.
- the base station 100 transmits UL data scheduling information to the terminal apparatus 200 in the DL band.
- the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243), based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA, for the transmission of the UL data, The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted.
- the base station 100 transmits UL data scheduling information to the terminal device 200 in a DL subframe in the UL region.
- the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243), based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA, for the transmission of the UL data, The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted.
- (D-2) ACK / NACK For example, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243), for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the DL band, the DL reception timing for the DL band and the first TA indicating the first TA.
- the UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted based on the information.
- the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) transmits the ACK / NACK for the DL data transmitted in the UL band, and the DL reception timing for the UL band and the second TA The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted based on the information.
- the base station 100 determines that the UL / DL is used when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode. Wireless communication in the UL band is performed according to the configuration.
- the UL / DL configuration is a UL / DL configuration of TDD. More specifically, for example, the UL / DL configuration is one of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG.
- the UL / DL configuration described above may be a different configuration (for example, a configuration unique to FDD) instead of the TDD UL / DL configuration.
- the base station 100 determines the UL / DL configuration when the operation mode is switched from the first mode to the second mode. And the UL / DL configuration is applied to the UL band.
- the base station 100 selects a UL / DL configuration having an appropriate ratio of DL subframes and UL subframes based on DL traffic and UL traffic in the cell 101.
- (A-3) UL / DL configuration change When the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (control unit 153) changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band to a plurality of UL / DL configurations. You may change in UL / DL configuration candidates. For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may change the UL / DL configuration for the UL band in the same manner as in a fifth embodiment to be described later.
- (A-4) UL / DL configuration notification For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits information indicating the UL / DL configuration for the UL band (hereinafter referred to as âconfiguration informationâ) to the terminal. Notify device 200.
- the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the configuration information in the system information.
- the configuration information may be included in the system information as new information.
- the configuration information may be included as information indicating the TDD UL / DL configuration in the system information transmitted in the DL subframe in the UL band.
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the configuration information by individual signaling to the terminal device 200.
- Random access (b-1) Random access time frequency domain
- the base station 100 broadcasts a PRACH (Physical Random Access Channel) configuration index and a PRACH frequency offset in the SIB (System Information Block) 2 .
- the terminal device 200 can know a radio resource (random access time frequency region) in which transmission of a random access preamble is permitted.
- only one random access time frequency region is arranged per subframe. It can be known from the PRACH configuration index in which subframe in the radio frame the random access time frequency region is arranged. It can be known from the PRACH frequency offset to which resource block the random access time frequency region is arranged.
- the base station 100 arranges a random access time frequency region in the UL subframe.
- (B-2) Random access procedure For example, the terminal device 200 transmits a random access preamble in the random access time frequency domain for the transition from the idle state to the connected state.
- the base station 100 transmits a random access response to the terminal device 200.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the TA command for the first TA.
- the base station 100 may notify the terminal device 200 of the TA command for the first TA and the TA command for the second TA.
- (C) Transmission of synchronization signal For example, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, the base station 100 transmits a synchronization signal in the UL band.
- the control unit 243 of the base station 100 performs processing for transmitting the synchronization signal in the UL band. Specifically, for example, the control unit 243 performs generation of the synchronization signal and / or mapping of the synchronization signal to a radio resource.
- the terminal device 200 can synchronize more accurately in the UL band.
- the synchronization signal is a signal corresponding to the cell ID, similarly to the synchronization signal transmitted in the DL band. More specifically, for example, the synchronization signals are PSS (Primary Synchronization Signal) and SSS (Secondary Synchronization Signal).
- PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
- SSS Secondary Synchronization Signal
- (C-2) Transmission in a predetermined subframe For example, in the second mode, the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division, and at least in a predetermined subframe of radio frames. In this mode, the UL band is used for DL. Then, the control unit 243 of the base station 100 transmits the synchronization signal in the predetermined subframe in the radio frame.
- control unit 243 of the base station 100 performs synchronization in the UL band so that a synchronization signal is transmitted in the predetermined subframe of the radio frame when the operation mode is the second mode. Performs processing for signal transmission.
- the predetermined subframes are subframes having subframe numbers 1 and 6 (PSS subframes) and subframes having subframe numbers 0 and 5 (SSS). Subframe).
- the predetermined subframe may be a subframe (subframe for PSS and SSS) having subframe numbers 0 and 5.
- the synchronization signal is reliably transmitted in the UL band, and the terminal device 200 can be more reliably synchronized in the UL band.
- Terminal Device 200 (control unit 243) performs synchronization in the UL band based on the synchronization signal.
- (D) Scheduling For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) performs radio resource allocation (that is, scheduling).
- (D-1) Legacy terminal-DL resource allocation
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits the DL band as a DL resource to a legacy terminal (ie, a terminal device that does not support the second mode). Allocate radio resources.
- the base station 100 determines that the intra-frame is within 4 frames before the UL subframe of the UL band.
- the DL band radio resources are allocated to legacy terminals. Thereby, for example, the legacy terminal can transmit ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the radio resource in the UL band.
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the legacy terminal of scheduling information (that is, information indicating radio resource allocation) in the DL band. More specifically, for example, in the PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel) of the DL band, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) performs the PDSCH (Physical Downlink Shared Channel) of the DL band and the PUSCH (Physical) of the UL band. The legacy terminal is notified of scheduling information on the uplink shared channel.
- scheduling information that is, information indicating radio resource allocation
- Terminal device 200 -Allocation of DL resource For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits, to the terminal device 200 (that is, a terminal device that supports the second mode), a DL resource as the DL resource, UL band radio resources (radio resources in the DL subframe) are allocated.
- the terminal device 200 may perform measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in the DL subframe in the UL band, and report the measurement result to the base station 100. If the measurement result is good (for example, if the received power is sufficiently large), the base station 100 (the control unit 153) uses the UL band radio resource (the radio resource in the DL subframe) as the terminal device. 200 may be assigned.
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information regarding the DL band in the DL band. More specifically, for example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information regarding the PDSCH of the DL band in the PDCCH of the DL band.
- the base station 100 when the operation mode is the second mode, notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information regarding the DL resource in the UL band in the DL band. More specifically, for example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information for the PDSCH in the UL band in the PDCCH in the DL band. That is, cross carrier scheduling is performed.
- the base station 100 may notify the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the DL resource in the UL band in the UL band. Good. More specifically, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may notify the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the PDSCH in the UL band in the UL band PDCCH.
- the base station 100 when the operation mode is the second mode, notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information regarding the UL resource of the UL band in the DL band. More specifically, for example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the PUSCH of the UL band in the PDCCH of the DL band.
- the base station 100 may notify the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the UL resource in the UL band in the UL band. Good. More specifically, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may notify the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the PUSCH in the UL band in the UL band PDCCH.
- the terminal device 200 notifies the base station 100 of capability information indicating whether or not flexible duplex is possible.
- the capability information indicates whether flexible duplex is possible for each band combination supported by the terminal device 200. Thereby, for example, the base station 100 can know that the terminal device 200 supports the second mode.
- the capability information may further indicate whether or not DL carrier aggregation and UL carrier aggregation are possible (for each band combination supported by the terminal device 200).
- FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram showing an example of a schematic flow of processing in the first mode according to the first embodiment.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the first TA (S301).
- the first TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the FDD DL band.
- the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the FDD UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA (S303). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S305). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S321).
- the mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode. In particular, the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode.
- the first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL
- the second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- the base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S323).
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the first TA (S325).
- the first TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the second TA (S327).
- the second TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band.
- the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA (S333). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S335). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
- the first embodiment has been described above. According to the first embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
- the terminal device 200 appropriately adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on either the DL reception timing for the DL band or the DL reception timing for the UL band. can do. Therefore, even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station 100 is realized. As a result, better wireless communication can be performed in the UL band.
- the base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- the operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
- the base station 100 instructs the first TA to be based on the DL reception timing for the DL band, and the UL band. For the second TA with reference to the DL reception timing for.
- the legacy terminal adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA.
- the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) transmits the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA. Based on the above, the UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted. Thereby, for example, the terminal device 200 can appropriately adjust the UL transmission timing for the UL band even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division.
- (A) Instruction in the second mode For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153), and the second instruction in the first TA and the second mode The above instructions for TAs are made.
- the second TA is longer than the first TA.
- (C) Instruction Method For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) performs the instruction for the first TA and the instruction for the second TA by notification of a timing advance (TA) command. .
- TA timing advance
- the TA command includes a TA command for the first TA and a TA command for the second TA. That is, the base station 100 (control unit 153) issues an instruction for the first TA by notifying the TA command for the first TA, and by notifying the TA command for the second TA. And instructing the second TA.
- the legacy terminal generates information indicating the first TA based on the TA command for the first TA.
- the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) generates information indicating the second TA based on the TA command for the second TA.
- the base station 100 transmits a random access response to the terminal device 200. At this time, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command. In particular, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the second TA.
- the base station 100 transmits a TA command for the first TA (TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band) to the terminal device. 200 is notified.
- the âfirst TAâ here simply means a TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band, and does not mean a TA for a specific terminal (for example, the legacy terminal). That is, the âfirst TAâ for the terminal device 200 and the âfirst TAâ for the legacy terminal are different TAs.
- FIG. 15 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of processing in the second mode according to the second embodiment.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S341).
- the mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode.
- the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode.
- the first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL
- the second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- the base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S343).
- the base station 100 notifies the legacy terminal of the TA command for the first TA (S345).
- the first TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the second TA (S347).
- the second TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band.
- the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA (S349). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S351). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
- the legacy terminal adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA (S353). Then, the legacy terminal performs UL transmission in the UL band (S355). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
- the second embodiment has been described above. According to the second embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
- the terminal device 200 when the operation mode is the second mode, the terminal device 200 is not based on the DL reception timing for the DL band, but based on the DL reception timing for the UL band. Then, the UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted. Therefore, even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station 100 is realized. As a result, better wireless communication can be performed in the UL band. Moreover, since the number of TAs for the terminal device 200 does not increase, an increase in signaling overhead can be suppressed.
- the base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- the operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
- (A) Trigger for switching The description of the trigger for switching the operation mode is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
- the base station 100 determines the FDD DL band corresponding to the UL band.
- the DL transmission timing is synchronized with the DL transmission timing for the UL band.
- FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of DL transmission timing for the DL band and the UL band.
- transmission / reception timings of the base station 100 and the terminal device 200 when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode are shown.
- the base station 100 requires time 51 to switch from UL to DL in the UL band.
- the base station 100 considers the time 51 and synchronizes the DL transmission timing for the UL band with the DL transmission timing for the DL band.
- the terminal device 200 for example, the DL reception timing for the DL band and the DL reception timing for the UL band are synchronized. Therefore, the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing (DL reception timing for the DL band or DL reception timing for the UL band) and the TA 53.
- the terminal device 200 can appropriately adjust the UL transmission timing for the UL band even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner.
- synchronizing timing may not mean âsynchronizing the timing so that there is no difference between timingsâ. It may mean that the timing is synchronized so that it falls within a predetermined range.
- the UL reception timing for the UL band is the DL transmission timing for the DL band.
- the predetermined time is a time required for switching from UL to DL in the UL band.
- the UL reception timing for the UL band is the time 51 (that is, the time required for switching from the UL to the DL in the UL band) rather than the DL transmission timing for the DL band. Only early.
- the terminal device 200 synchronizes the DL transmission timing for the DL band and the DL transmission timing for the UL band even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner. It becomes possible to make it.
- the UL reception timing for the UL band is the same as that for the DL band.
- the predetermined time may be earlier than the DL transmission timing. That is, even if the operation mode is switched, the base station 100 does not have to change the UL reception timing for the UL band.
- the UL reception timing for the UL band is: It synchronizes with the DL transmission timing for the DL band.
- the operation mode is the second mode
- the UL reception timing for the UL band is earlier than the DL transmission timing for the DL band by the predetermined time.
- the base station 100 may increase the TA for UL transmission in the UL band by the predetermined time in accordance with the switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode. And instructing the TA.
- This instruction is an instruction to the terminal device 200.
- the UL reception timing for the UL band can be advanced by a predetermined time in accordance with the switching. As a result, for example, collision between the UL subframe and the DL subframe is avoided.
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) gives the instruction for the TA by the notification of the TA command in the subframe six subframes before the switching.
- the TA command indicates a value (T A ) that makes the TA for UL transmission in the UL band longer by the predetermined time. Thereby, for example, the TA can be lengthened by the predetermined time at the switching timing.
- the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) generates information (for example, N TA ) indicating the UL transmission TA in the UL band based on the TA command.
- information for example, N TA
- the base station 100 determines that the TA for UL transmission in the UL band is the predetermined time.
- An instruction for the TA is given to shorten the time.
- the base station 100 gives the instruction for the TA by notifying the TA command in a subframe six subframes before the switching.
- offset information The base station 100 (control unit 153) gives the instruction for the TA by notification of information indicating the offset corresponding to the predetermined time (hereinafter referred to as âoffset informationâ). May be.
- the terminal device 200 may generate information indicating the TA of UL transmission in the UL band (for example, N TA ) based on the offset information.
- the base station 100 may notify the terminal device 200 of the offset information NTA_offset (for example, in the system information or by signaling).
- Terminal device 200, and an N TA and N TA_offset may calculate a new N TA. That is, the terminal device 200 may newly generate NTA that is information indicating the TA.
- NTA_offset may be a predetermined value (for example, 624).
- the terminal device 200 generates the information indicating the TA (for example, N TA ) based on the offset information when the operation mode of the UL band is switched from the first mode to the second mode. May be. Thereafter, the terminal device 200 may generate (update) the information (for example, N TA ) indicating the TA based on the TA command.
- the terminal device 200 may generate (update) the information (for example, N TA ) indicating the TA based on the TA command.
- the base station 100 may notify the offset information in the system information.
- the base station 100 may notify the offset information by individual signaling.
- the individual signaling may be RRC signaling.
- the offset information may be stored in the terminal device 200 in advance.
- the UL reception timing for the UL band depends on whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode. Instead, it may be earlier than the DL transmission timing for the DL band by the predetermined time.
- the base station 100 may instruct the UL transmission TA in the UL band as usual, regardless of whether or not the operation mode is switched.
- the base station 100 may instruct the TA as usual by notifying the TA command.
- the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing and the TA for UL transmission in the UL band.
- the DL reception timing is a DL reception timing for the DL band.
- the DL reception timing may be a DL reception timing for the DL band or a DL reception timing for the UL band. .
- (B-2) Random access procedure For example, the terminal device 200 transmits a random access preamble in the random access time frequency domain for the transition from the idle state to the connected state.
- the base station 100 transmits a random access response to the terminal device 200. At this time, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command.
- (C) Synchronization signal For example, even if the operation mode is the second mode, a synchronization signal is not transmitted in the UL band. That is, the base station 100 does not transmit a synchronization signal in the UL band even when the operation mode is the second mode. This is because the DL transmission timing for the UL band is synchronized with the DL transmission timing for the DL band. Thereby, for example, radio resources are saved.
- the base station 100 may transmit a synchronization signal in the UL band when the operation mode is the second mode.
- FIG. 17 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of processing according to the third embodiment. In the description of the processing, it is assumed that the operation mode for the UL band of the FDD is first the first mode.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for TA (S361).
- the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the FDD UL band based on the DL reception timing for the FDD DL band and the information indicating the TA (S363). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S365). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S367).
- the mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode. In particular, the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode.
- the first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL
- the second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for TA before the switching of the operation mode (S369). For example, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the TA command in a subframe six subframes before the switching.
- the base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S371). Further, the base station 100 synchronizes the DL transmission timing for the DL band and the DL transmission timing for the UL band (S373).
- the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band or the UL band and the information indicating the TA (S375). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S377). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
- the third embodiment has been described above. According to the third embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
- the terminal device 200 appropriately adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on either the DL reception timing for the DL band or the DL reception timing for the UL band. can do. Therefore, even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station 100 is realized. As a result, better wireless communication can be performed in the UL band. Moreover, since the number of TAs for the terminal device 200 does not increase, an increase in signaling overhead can be suppressed.
- the base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- the operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
- the base station 100 determines whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode.
- the TA is instructed based on the DL reception timing for the FDD DL band corresponding to the UL band.
- This instruction is an instruction to the terminal device 200. Note that the base station 100 (the control unit 153) does not give an instruction about TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band.
- the terminal device 200 determines whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode, regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode.
- the UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted based on the DL reception timing.
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) gives the above instruction for the TA by notifying the TA command for the TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band.
- the terminal device (information acquisition unit 241) acquires the TA command.
- the terminal device 200 (control part 243) adjusts UL transmission timing about the said UL band based on the DL reception timing about the said DL band, and the information which shows said TA.
- the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) generates the information indicating the TA based on the TA command.
- the base station 100 sends a TA command for TA43 (TA based on DL reception timing for the DL band) to the terminal apparatus 200 regardless of the operation mode for the UL band.
- the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) adjusts the UL transmission timing in the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the TA 43, regardless of the operation mode for the UL band. .
- (B-2) Random access procedure For example, the terminal device 200 transmits a random access preamble in the random access time frequency domain for the transition from the idle state to the connected state.
- the base station 100 transmits a random access response to the terminal device 200. At this time, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command.
- FIG. 18 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of a process according to the fourth embodiment. In the description of the processing, it is assumed that the operation mode for the UL band of the FDD is first the first mode.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band of the FDD (S381).
- the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band of the FDD based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the TA (S383). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S385). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S387).
- the mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode. In particular, the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode.
- the first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL
- the second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- the base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S389).
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band (S391).
- the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the TA (S393). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S395). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
- the fourth embodiment has been described above. According to the fourth embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
- the terminal device 200 determines whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode based on the DL reception timing for the DL band, regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode.
- the UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted. Therefore, even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station 100 is realized. As a result, better wireless communication can be performed in the UL band.
- the number of TAs for the terminal device 200 does not increase, an increase in signaling overhead can be suppressed.
- the FDD UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication may not be performed well in the UL band.
- ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in four subframes of the certain subframe in the FDD UL band. It is transmitted in a subframe after the frame.
- a subframe after four subframes of the certain subframe may be a DL subframe. Therefore, the terminal device may not be able to transmit the ACK / NACK for the DL data.
- the subframe in which DL data is transmitted in the DL band may be limited to a subframe that is four subframes before the UL subframe.
- FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example in which a subframe in which ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted is a DL subframe.
- an FDD DL band subframe and an FDD UL band subframe are shown.
- the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- an ACK / NACK for the DL data usually has a subframe number of 4 in the UL band.
- Sent in subframe
- the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, and the subframe having a subframe number of 4 is a DL subframe.
- NACK cannot be transmitted.
- the base station cannot transmit the DL data in a subframe whose subframe number is 0.
- an ACK / NACK for the DL data usually has a subframe number in the UL band. 5 is transmitted in a subframe.
- the terminal apparatus since the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, and the subframe having a subframe number of 5 is a DL subframe, the terminal apparatus transmits an ACK for the DL data. / NACK cannot be transmitted.
- the base station cannot transmit the DL data in a subframe whose subframe number is 1.
- the base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- the operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
- the description of the operation mode switching in the fifth embodiment is the same as the description of the operation mode switching in any of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
- (2) UL / DL configuration For example, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, the base station 100 (control unit 153) performs radio transmission in the UL band according to the UL / DL configuration. Communicate.
- the UL / DL configuration is a UL / DL configuration of TDD. More specifically, for example, the UL / DL configuration is one of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG.
- the UL / DL configuration described above may be a different configuration (for example, a configuration unique to FDD) instead of the TDD UL / DL configuration.
- (C) Change of UL / DL configuration For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band to a plurality of UL / DL configurations. Change in UL / DL configuration candidates.
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) may dynamically change the UL / DL configuration for the UL band, and semi-statically change the UL / DL configuration for the UL band. (Semi-statically)
- the multiple UL / DL configuration candidates are a plurality of UL / DL configurations of TDD. More specifically, for example, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are two or more of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG. As an example, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are configurations 0, 1, 3, and 4 shown in FIG.
- the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates may be a plurality of different configurations (for example, a plurality of configurations unique to FDD) instead of a plurality of UL / DL configurations of TDD.
- the base station 100 changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band based on the DL traffic and the UL traffic in the cell 101. More specifically, for example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band to a UL / DL configuration having a more appropriate ratio of DL subframes to UL subframes. Change to
- the amount of DL resources and the amount of UL resources can be adjusted more flexibly.
- the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits information indicating the UL / DL configuration for the UL band (hereinafter referred to as âconfiguration informationâ) to the terminal device 200.
- configuration information information indicating the UL / DL configuration for the UL band
- the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the configuration information in the system information.
- the configuration information may be included in the system information as new information.
- the configuration information may be included as information indicating the TDD UL / DL configuration in the system information transmitted in the DL subframe in the UL band.
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the configuration information by individual signaling to the terminal device 200.
- the individual signaling is RRC signaling.
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) has the above operation mode
- the terminal apparatus 200 is notified of information related to subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data (hereinafter referred to as âDL-ACK / NACK subframe-related informationâ).
- the terminal device acquires the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information. Furthermore, when the operation mode is the second mode, the terminal device 200 transmits ACK / NACK for DL data in the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information. When the operation mode is the second mode, the control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 performs processing for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information. I do.
- the DL data includes DL data transmitted in the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band. That is, the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information is information regarding a subframe in which ACK / NACK is transmitted for DL data transmitted in the DL band.
- the control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 determines DL data transmitted in the DL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information. ACK / NACK is transmitted in the UL band.
- the DL data further includes DL data transmitted in the UL band.
- the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information is information related to a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the UL band.
- the control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 determines DL data transmitted in the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information. ACK / NACK is transmitted in the UL band.
- the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the DL data) is a UL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
- the terminal device 200 transmits ACK / NACK for DL data to the UL sub Can be sent in frames.
- the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the DL data) is for the first UL / DL configuration candidate among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. It is a defined subframe for transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data.
- the first UL / DL configuration candidate may be referred to as a DL reference UL / DL configuration.
- subframes subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data
- DL reference UL / DL configuration an example of subframes (subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data) defined for DL reference UL / DL configuration will be described with reference to FIG.
- FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of subframes defined for DL reference UL / DL configuration.
- a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data defined for DL reference UL / DL configuration.
- This table is the same as Table 10.1.3A-1 included in 3GPP TS 36.213.
- subframes with subframe numbers 2 and 3 are defined as subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data. More specifically, in a subframe having a subframe number of 2, it was transmitted in a subframe that is 7 to 12 subframes before the subframe (that is, a subframe having a subframe number of 0 to 5).
- ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted. Further, in the subframe having the subframe number 3, the DL data transmitted in the subframe 4 to 7 subframes before the subframe (that is, the subframe having the subframe number 6 to 9) is transmitted. ACK / NACK is transmitted.
- the first UL / DL configuration candidate is a UL / DL configuration candidate having the smallest number of UL subframes among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
- the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are the configurations 0, 1, 3, and 4 shown in FIG.
- the first UL / DL configuration candidate is the configuration 4 shown in FIG.
- subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data are subframes having subframe numbers 2 and 3, as shown in FIG.
- FIGS. 21 and 22 an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.
- FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the DL band.
- a subframe of the FDD DL band and a subframe of the FDD UL band are shown.
- the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- the UL / DL configuration for the UL band is configuration 4.
- ACK / NACK for the DL data has a subframe number in the UL band. 2 is transmitted in a subframe (UL subframe).
- ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in the UL band in the subband. It is transmitted in a subframe (UL subframe) whose number is 3.
- FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the UL band.
- an FDD DL band subframe and an FDD UL band subframe are shown.
- the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- the UL / DL configuration for the UL band is configuration 4. For example, when DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 0, 1, 4, or 5 in the UL band, ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in the UL band. It is transmitted in a subframe (UL subframe) whose subframe number is 2.
- ACK / NACK for the DL data is subframed in the UL band. It is transmitted in a subframe (UL subframe) whose number is 3.
- the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the DL data) is not limited to this example.
- the subframe may be an arbitrary UL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
- the terminal apparatus 200 transmits ACK / NACK for DL data to the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information, regardless of the UL / DL subframe for the UL band. Send in.
- the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information includes information indicating the first UL / DL configuration candidate (hereinafter referred to as âDL reference UL / DLâ). Called configuration information).
- the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are two or more of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG. 4, and the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is: One of indexes 0 to 6.
- the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is not limited to the DL reference UL / DL configuration information, and may be other information.
- the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information may be information indicating a subframe in which ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted when the operation mode is the second mode. Specifically, it may be information corresponding to any row of the table shown in FIG.
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information by individual signaling.
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information to the terminal device 200 by the individual signaling when the state of the terminal device 200 transitions from the idle state to the connected state.
- the individual signaling is RRC signaling.
- the base station 100 may notify the terminal device 200 of the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information in the system information.
- the system information may be system information transmitted in the UL band, or may be system information transmitted in the DL band.
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits ACK / NACK for UL data when the operation mode is the second mode.
- the terminal apparatus 200 is notified of information related to the subframe to be transmitted (hereinafter referred to as âUL-ACK / NACK subframe related informationâ).
- the terminal device acquires the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information.
- the terminal device 200 receives ACK / NACK for UL data in the UL band based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information.
- the control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 performs processing for receiving ACK / NACK for UL data based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information. I do.
- the UL band when used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, it becomes possible to appropriately receive ACK / NACK for UL data.
- the uplink data is UL data transmitted in the UL band.
- the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is a DL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
- the DL subframe includes not only a pure DL subframe but also a special subframe.
- the terminal device 200 transmits ACK / NACK for UL data to the DL sub Can be received in frames.
- the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is for a second UL / DL configuration candidate among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. It is a defined subframe for transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data.
- the second UL / DL configuration candidate may be referred to as a UL reference UL / DL configuration.
- FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of subframes defined for UL reference UL / DL configuration. Referring to FIG.
- a subframe for transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data defined for UL reference UL / DL configuration.
- This table is the same as Table 9.1.2-1 included in 3GPP TS 36.213.
- an ACK / NACK for the UL data is a subframe after 4 subframes (that is, the subframe number is 6).
- an ACK / NACK for the UL data is a subframe after 7 subframes (that is, the subframe number is 0).
- subframes with subframe numbers 0, 1, 5, and 6 are defined as subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for UL data.
- the second UL / DL configuration candidate is the UL / DL configuration candidate having the smallest number of DL subframes among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
- the DL subframe includes not only a pure DL subframe but also a special subframe.
- the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are the configurations 0, 1, 3, and 4 shown in FIG.
- the second UL / DL configuration candidate is the configuration 0 shown in FIG.
- subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for UL data are subframes having subframe numbers 0, 1, 5, and 6, as shown in FIG.
- FIG. 1 an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data will be described with reference to FIG.
- FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data transmitted in the UL band.
- an FDD DL band subframe and an FDD UL band subframe are shown.
- the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- the UL / DL configuration for the UL band is configuration 4.
- an ACK / NACK for the UL data is a subframe having a subframe number of 6 in the UL band. (DL subframe).
- ACK / NACK for the UL data has a subframe number of 0 in the UL band. It is transmitted in a subframe (DL subframe).
- the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is not limited to this example.
- the subframe may be any DL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
- the terminal apparatus 200 transmits ACK / NACK for UL data based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information, regardless of the UL / DL subframe for the UL band, to the UL band. Send in.
- the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information includes information indicating the second UL / DL configuration candidate (hereinafter referred to as âUL reference UL / DLâ). Called configuration information).
- the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are two or more of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG. 4, and the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is: One of indexes 0 to 6.
- the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is not limited to the UL reference UL / DL configuration information, and may be other information.
- the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information may be information indicating a subframe in which ACK / NACK for UL data is transmitted when the operation mode is the second mode. Specifically, it may be information corresponding to any row of the table shown in FIG.
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information by individual signaling.
- the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information to the terminal device 200 by the individual signaling.
- the individual signaling is RRC signaling.
- the base station 100 may notify the terminal device 200 of the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information in the system information.
- the system information may be system information transmitted in the UL band, or may be system information transmitted in the DL band.
- the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is a DL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
- the DL subframe includes not only a pure DL subframe but also a special subframe.
- the terminal device 200 controls the measurement for the UL band based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information.
- the terminal device 200 performs measurement on the UL band based on a reference signal transmitted in the UL band in the subframe (transmits ACK / NACK for the UL data).
- the reference signal is CRS (Cell-specific Reference Signal)
- the measurement is RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) and / or RSRQ (Reference Signal Received Quality).
- the terminal device 200 can perform measurement on a subframe (that is, DL subframe) in which the reference signal is reliably transmitted.
- a subframe that is, DL subframe
- measurement errors are avoided.
- (C) Synchronization signal The description of the transmission of the synchronization signal in the fifth embodiment is the same as the description of the transmission of the synchronization signal in any of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
- FIG. 25 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of a process according to the fifth embodiment. In the description of the processing, it is assumed that the operation mode for the UL band of the FDD is first the first mode.
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal apparatus 200 of DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information (S401).
- the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information is information on a subframe in which ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted when the operation mode for the UL band of FDD is the second mode.
- the second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is information indicating a DL reference UL / DL configuration.
- the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information (S403).
- the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information is information regarding a subframe in which ACK / NACK for UL data is transmitted when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode.
- the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is information indicating a UL reference UL / DL configuration.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S405).
- the mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode. In particular, the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode.
- the first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the UL / DL configuration for the UL band (S407).
- the base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S409).
- the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 (S411). For example, the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 in a DL subframe in the UL band. Alternatively, the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 in the DL band. Then, terminal apparatus 200 transmits ACK / NACK for the DL data to base station 100 in the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information (S413).
- the terminal device 200 transmits UL data to the base station 100 in the UL band (S415). Then, the base station 100 transmits ACK / NACK for the UL data to the terminal device 200 in the DL band in the UL band (S417). The terminal device 200 receives the ACK / NACK for the UL data in the UL band based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information.
- the base station 100 changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band (S419).
- the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 (S421). For example, the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 in a DL subframe in the UL band. Alternatively, the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 in the DL band. Then, terminal apparatus 200 transmits ACK / NACK for the DL data to base station 100 in the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information (S423).
- the terminal device 200 transmits UL data to the base station 100 in the UL band (S425). Then, the base station 100 transmits ACK / NACK for the UL data to the terminal device 200 in the DL band in the UL band (S427). The terminal device 200 receives the ACK / NACK for the UL data in the UL band based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information.
- the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the changed UL / DL configuration at any timing.
- the terminal apparatus 200 may be notified of the changed UL / DL configuration before transmission of ACK / NACK (S423, S427), and changed after transmission of ACK / NACK (S423, S427).
- the UL / DL configuration may be notified.
- the terminal apparatus 200 can transmit ACK / NACK for the DL data based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information (S423), and the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information.
- the ACK / NACK for the UL data can be received based on (S427).
- the fourth embodiment has been described above.
- wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
- ACK / NACK for DL data is appropriately transmitted.
- ACK / NACK for UL data is appropriately transmitted.
- any one of the first to fourth embodiments may be combined with the fifth embodiment.
- the base station 100 (especially the control unit 153) in any of the first to fourth embodiments performs the operation of the base station 100 (especially the control unit 153) in the fifth embodiment.
- the terminal device 200 (especially the control unit 243) in any of the first to fourth embodiments may perform the operation of the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) in the fifth embodiment.
- the base station 100 may be realized as any type of eNB (evolved Node B) such as a macro eNB or a small eNB.
- the small eNB may be an eNB that covers a cell smaller than a macro cell, such as a pico eNB, a micro eNB, or a home (femto) eNB.
- the base station 100 may be realized as another type of base station such as a NodeB or a BTS (Base Transceiver Station).
- Base station 100 may include a main body (also referred to as a base station apparatus) that controls radio communication, and one or more RRHs (Remote Radio Heads) that are arranged at locations different from the main body. Further, various types of terminals described later may operate as the base station 100 by temporarily or semi-permanently executing the base station function. Furthermore, at least some components of the base station 100 may be realized in a base station apparatus or a module for the base station apparatus.
- RRHs Remote Radio Heads
- the terminal device 200 is a smartphone, a tablet PC (Personal Computer), a notebook PC, a portable game terminal, a mobile terminal such as a portable / dongle type mobile router or a digital camera, or an in-vehicle terminal such as a car navigation device. It may be realized as.
- the terminal device 200 may be realized as a terminal (also referred to as an MTC (Machine Type Communication) terminal) that performs M2M (Machine To Machine) communication.
- MTC Machine Type Communication
- M2M Machine To Machine
- at least a part of the components of the terminal device 200 may be realized in a module (for example, an integrated circuit module configured by one die) mounted on these terminals.
- FIG. 26 is a block diagram illustrating a first example of a schematic configuration of an eNB to which the technology according to the present disclosure may be applied.
- the eNB 800 includes one or more antennas 810 and a base station device 820. Each antenna 810 and the base station apparatus 820 can be connected to each other via an RF cable.
- Each of the antennas 810 has a single or a plurality of antenna elements (for example, a plurality of antenna elements constituting a MIMO antenna), and is used for transmission and reception of radio signals by the base station apparatus 820.
- the eNB 800 includes a plurality of antennas 810 as illustrated in FIG. 26, and the plurality of antennas 810 may respectively correspond to a plurality of frequency bands used by the eNB 800, for example. 26 shows an example in which the eNB 800 includes a plurality of antennas 810, but the eNB 800 may include a single antenna 810.
- the base station apparatus 820 includes a controller 821, a memory 822, a network interface 823, and a wireless communication interface 825.
- the controller 821 may be a CPU or a DSP, for example, and operates various functions of the upper layer of the base station apparatus 820. For example, the controller 821 generates a data packet from the data in the signal processed by the wireless communication interface 825, and transfers the generated packet via the network interface 823. The controller 821 may generate a bundled packet by bundling data from a plurality of baseband processors, and may transfer the generated bundled packet. In addition, the controller 821 is a logic that executes control such as radio resource control, radio bearer control, mobility management, inflow control, or scheduling. May have a typical function. Moreover, the said control may be performed in cooperation with a surrounding eNB or a core network node.
- the memory 822 includes RAM and ROM, and stores programs executed by the controller 821 and various control data (for example, terminal list, transmission power data, scheduling data, and the like).
- the network interface 823 is a communication interface for connecting the base station device 820 to the core network 824.
- the controller 821 may communicate with the core network node or other eNB via the network interface 823.
- the eNB 800 and the core network node or another eNB may be connected to each other by a logical interface (for example, an S1 interface or an X2 interface).
- the network interface 823 may be a wired communication interface or a wireless communication interface for wireless backhaul.
- the network interface 823 may use a frequency band higher than the frequency band used by the wireless communication interface 825 for wireless communication.
- the wireless communication interface 825 supports any cellular communication scheme such as LTE (Long Term Evolution) or LTE-Advanced, and provides a wireless connection to terminals located in the cell of the eNB 800 via the antenna 810.
- the wireless communication interface 825 may typically include a baseband (BB) processor 826, an RF circuit 827, and the like.
- the BB processor 826 may perform, for example, encoding / decoding, modulation / demodulation, and multiplexing / demultiplexing, and each layer (for example, L1, MAC (Medium Access Control), RLC (Radio Link Control), and PDCP).
- Various signal processing of Packet Data Convergence Protocol
- Packet Data Convergence Protocol is executed.
- the BB processor 826 may have some or all of the logical functions described above instead of the controller 821.
- the BB processor 826 may be a module that includes a memory that stores a communication control program, a processor that executes the program, and related circuits. The function of the BB processor 826 may be changed by updating the program. Good.
- the module may be a card or a blade inserted into a slot of the base station apparatus 820, or a chip mounted on the card or the blade.
- the RF circuit 827 may include a mixer, a filter, an amplifier, and the like, and transmits and receives a radio signal via the antenna 810.
- the radio communication interface 825 includes a plurality of BB processors 826 as illustrated in FIG. 26, and the plurality of BB processors 826 may respectively correspond to a plurality of frequency bands used by the eNB 800, for example.
- the wireless communication interface 825 may include a plurality of RF circuits 827 as illustrated in FIG. 26, and the plurality of RF circuits 827 may correspond to, for example, a plurality of antenna elements.
- 26 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 825 includes a plurality of BB processors 826 and a plurality of RF circuits 827, the wireless communication interface 825 includes a single BB processor 826 or a single RF circuit 827. But you can.
- the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 described with reference to FIG. 8 may be implemented in the wireless communication interface 825. Alternatively, at least some of these components may be implemented in the controller 821.
- the eNB 800 includes a module including a part (for example, the BB processor 826) or all of the wireless communication interface 825 and / or the controller 821, and the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 are mounted in the module. May be.
- the module executes a program for causing the processor to function as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 (in other words, a program for causing the processor to execute the operation of the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153).
- a program for causing a processor to function as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 is installed in the eNB 800, and the radio communication interface 825 (for example, the BB processor 826) and / or the controller 821 executes the program.
- the eNB 800, the base station device 820, or the module may be provided as a device including the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153, and the processor functions as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153.
- a program may be provided.
- a readable recording medium in which the program is recorded may be provided.
- the radio communication unit 120 described with reference to FIG. 8 may be implemented in the radio communication interface 825 (for example, the RF circuit 827). Further, the antenna unit 110 may be mounted on the antenna 810.
- the network communication unit 130 may be implemented in the controller 821 and / or the network interface 823.
- FIG. 27 is a block diagram illustrating a second example of a schematic configuration of an eNB to which the technology according to the present disclosure may be applied.
- the eNB 830 includes one or more antennas 840, a base station apparatus 850, and an RRH 860. Each antenna 840 and RRH 860 may be connected to each other via an RF cable. Base station apparatus 850 and RRH 860 can be connected to each other via a high-speed line such as an optical fiber cable.
- Each of the antennas 840 has a single or a plurality of antenna elements (for example, a plurality of antenna elements constituting a MIMO antenna), and is used for transmission / reception of radio signals by the RRH 860.
- the eNB 830 includes a plurality of antennas 840 as illustrated in FIG. 27, and the plurality of antennas 840 may respectively correspond to a plurality of frequency bands used by the eNB 830, for example.
- 27 illustrates an example in which the eNB 830 includes a plurality of antennas 840, but the eNB 830 may include a single antenna 840.
- the base station device 850 includes a controller 851, a memory 852, a network interface 853, a wireless communication interface 855, and a connection interface 857.
- the controller 851, the memory 852, and the network interface 853 are the same as the controller 821, the memory 822, and the network interface 823 described with reference to FIG.
- the plurality of BB processors 856 may respectively correspond to a plurality of frequency bands used by the eNB 830, for example.
- 27 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 855 includes a plurality of BB processors 856, the wireless communication interface 855 may include a single BB processor 856.
- connection interface 857 is an interface for connecting the base station device 850 (wireless communication interface 855) to the RRH 860.
- the connection interface 857 may be a communication module for communication on the high-speed line that connects the base station apparatus 850 (wireless communication interface 855) and the RRH 860.
- the RRH 860 includes a connection interface 861 and a wireless communication interface 863.
- connection interface 861 is an interface for connecting the RRH 860 (wireless communication interface 863) to the base station device 850.
- the connection interface 861 may be a communication module for communication on the high-speed line.
- the wireless communication interface 863 transmits and receives wireless signals via the antenna 840.
- the wireless communication interface 863 may typically include an RF circuit 864 and the like.
- the RF circuit 864 may include a mixer, a filter, an amplifier, and the like, and transmits and receives wireless signals via the antenna 840.
- the wireless communication interface 863 includes a plurality of RF circuits 864 as illustrated in FIG. 27, and the plurality of RF circuits 864 may correspond to, for example, a plurality of antenna elements, respectively.
- 27 illustrates an example in which the wireless communication interface 863 includes a plurality of RF circuits 864, the wireless communication interface 863 may include a single RF circuit 864.
- the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 described with reference to FIG. 8 may be implemented in the wireless communication interface 855 and / or the wireless communication interface 863. Alternatively, at least some of these components may be implemented in the controller 851. As an example, the eNB 830 includes a module including a part (for example, the BB processor 856) or all of the wireless communication interface 855 and / or the controller 851, and the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 are mounted in the module. May be.
- the module executes a program for causing the processor to function as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 (in other words, a program for causing the processor to execute the operation of the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153).
- a program for causing a processor to function as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 is installed in the eNB 830, and the radio communication interface 855 (for example, the BB processor 856) and / or the controller 851 executes the program. May be.
- the eNB 830, the base station device 850, or the module may be provided as a device including the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153, and the processor functions as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153.
- a program may be provided.
- a readable recording medium in which the program is recorded may be provided.
- the radio communication unit 120 described with reference to FIG. 8 may be implemented in the radio communication interface 863 (for example, the RF circuit 864).
- the antenna unit 110 may be mounted on the antenna 840.
- the network communication unit 130 may be implemented in the controller 851 and / or the network interface 853.
- FIG. 28 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a smartphone 900 to which the technology according to the present disclosure can be applied.
- the smartphone 900 includes a processor 901, a memory 902, a storage 903, an external connection interface 904, a camera 906, a sensor 907, a microphone 908, an input device 909, a display device 910, a speaker 911, a wireless communication interface 912, one or more antenna switches 915.
- One or more antennas 916, a bus 917, a battery 918 and an auxiliary controller 919 are provided.
- the processor 901 may be, for example, a CPU or a SoC (System on Chip), and controls the functions of the application layer and other layers of the smartphone 900.
- the memory 902 includes a RAM and a ROM, and stores programs executed by the processor 901 and data.
- the storage 903 can include a storage medium such as a semiconductor memory or a hard disk.
- the external connection interface 904 is an interface for connecting an external device such as a memory card or a USB (Universal Serial Bus) device to the smartphone 900.
- the camera 906 includes, for example, an image sensor such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor), and generates a captured image.
- the sensor 907 may include a sensor group such as a positioning sensor, a gyro sensor, a geomagnetic sensor, and an acceleration sensor.
- the microphone 908 converts sound input to the smartphone 900 into an audio signal.
- the input device 909 includes, for example, a touch sensor that detects a touch on the screen of the display device 910, a keypad, a keyboard, a button, or a switch, and receives an operation or information input from a user.
- the display device 910 has a screen such as a liquid crystal display (LCD) or an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, and displays an output image of the smartphone 900.
- the speaker 911 converts an audio signal output from the smartphone 900 into audio.
- the wireless communication interface 912 supports any cellular communication method such as LTE or LTE-Advanced, and performs wireless communication.
- the wireless communication interface 912 may typically include a BB processor 913, an RF circuit 914, and the like.
- the BB processor 913 may perform, for example, encoding / decoding, modulation / demodulation, and multiplexing / demultiplexing, and performs various signal processing for wireless communication.
- the RF circuit 914 may include a mixer, a filter, an amplifier, and the like, and transmits and receives radio signals via the antenna 916.
- the wireless communication interface 912 may be a one-chip module in which the BB processor 913 and the RF circuit 914 are integrated.
- the wireless communication interface 912 may support other types of wireless communication methods such as a short-range wireless communication method, a proximity wireless communication method, or a wireless LAN (Local Area Network) method in addition to the cellular communication method.
- a BB processor 913 and an RF circuit 914 for each wireless communication method may be included.
- Each of the antenna switches 915 switches the connection destination of the antenna 916 among a plurality of circuits (for example, circuits for different wireless communication systems) included in the wireless communication interface 912.
- Each of the antennas 916 includes a single or a plurality of antenna elements (for example, a plurality of antenna elements constituting a MIMO antenna), and is used for transmission / reception of a radio signal by the radio communication interface 912.
- the smartphone 900 may include a plurality of antennas 916 as illustrated in FIG. Note that FIG. 28 illustrates an example in which the smartphone 900 includes a plurality of antennas 916, but the smartphone 900 may include a single antenna 916.
- the smartphone 900 may include an antenna 916 for each wireless communication method.
- the antenna switch 915 may be omitted from the configuration of the smartphone 900.
- the bus 917 connects the processor 901, memory 902, storage 903, external connection interface 904, camera 906, sensor 907, microphone 908, input device 909, display device 910, speaker 911, wireless communication interface 912, and auxiliary controller 919 to each other.
- the battery 918 supplies electric power to each block of the smartphone 900 shown in FIG. 28 through a power supply line partially shown by a broken line in the drawing.
- the auxiliary controller 919 operates the minimum necessary functions of the smartphone 900 in the sleep mode.
- the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 described with reference to FIG. 9 may be implemented in the wireless communication interface 912.
- the smartphone 900 illustrated in FIG. Alternatively, at least some of these components may be implemented in the processor 901 or the auxiliary controller 919.
- the smartphone 900 includes a module including a part (for example, the BB processor 913) or the whole of the wireless communication interface 912, the processor 901, and / or the auxiliary controller 919, and the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the module is included in the module.
- the control unit 243 may be mounted.
- the module is a program for causing the processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 (in other words, a program for causing the processor to execute the operation of the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243).
- the program may be executed.
- a program for causing a processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 is installed in the smartphone 900, and the wireless communication interface 912 (for example, the BB processor 913), the processor 901, and / or the auxiliary controller is installed. 919 may execute the program.
- the smartphone 900 or the module may be provided as a device including the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243, and a program for causing the processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 is provided. May be provided.
- a readable recording medium in which the program is recorded may be provided.
- the wireless communication unit 220 described with reference to FIG. 9 may be implemented in the wireless communication interface 912 (for example, the RF circuit 914).
- the antenna unit 210 may be mounted on the antenna 916.
- FIG. 29 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a car navigation device 920 to which the technology according to the present disclosure can be applied.
- the car navigation device 920 includes a processor 921, a memory 922, a GPS (Global Positioning System) module 924, a sensor 925, a data interface 926, a content player 927, a storage medium interface 928, an input device 929, a display device 930, a speaker 931, and wireless communication.
- the interface 933 includes one or more antenna switches 936, one or more antennas 937, and a battery 938.
- the processor 921 may be a CPU or SoC, for example, and controls the navigation function and other functions of the car navigation device 920.
- the memory 922 includes RAM and ROM, and stores programs and data executed by the processor 921.
- the GPS module 924 measures the position (for example, latitude, longitude, and altitude) of the car navigation device 920 using GPS signals received from GPS satellites.
- the sensor 925 may include a sensor group such as a gyro sensor, a geomagnetic sensor, and an atmospheric pressure sensor.
- the data interface 926 is connected to the in-vehicle network 941 through a terminal (not shown), for example, and acquires data generated on the vehicle side such as vehicle speed data.
- the content player 927 reproduces content stored in a storage medium (for example, CD or DVD) inserted into the storage medium interface 928.
- the input device 929 includes, for example, a touch sensor, a button, or a switch that detects a touch on the screen of the display device 930, and receives an operation or information input from the user.
- the display device 930 has a screen such as an LCD or an OLED display, and displays a navigation function or an image of content to be reproduced.
- the speaker 931 outputs the navigation function or the audio of the content to be played back.
- the wireless communication interface 933 supports any cellular communication method such as LTE or LTE-Advanced, and performs wireless communication.
- the wireless communication interface 933 may typically include a BB processor 934, an RF circuit 935, and the like.
- the BB processor 934 may perform, for example, encoding / decoding, modulation / demodulation, and multiplexing / demultiplexing, and performs various signal processing for wireless communication.
- the RF circuit 935 may include a mixer, a filter, an amplifier, and the like, and transmits and receives a radio signal via the antenna 937.
- the wireless communication interface 933 may be a one-chip module in which the BB processor 934 and the RF circuit 935 are integrated.
- the wireless communication interface 933 may include a plurality of BB processors 934 and a plurality of RF circuits 935 as shown in FIG. 29 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 933 includes a plurality of BB processors 934 and a plurality of RF circuits 935, the wireless communication interface 933 includes a single BB processor 934 or a single RF circuit 935. But you can.
- the wireless communication interface 933 may support other types of wireless communication methods such as a short-range wireless communication method, a proximity wireless communication method, or a wireless LAN method in addition to the cellular communication method.
- a BB processor 934 and an RF circuit 935 may be included for each communication method.
- Each of the antenna switches 936 switches the connection destination of the antenna 937 among a plurality of circuits included in the wireless communication interface 933 (for example, circuits for different wireless communication systems).
- Each of the antennas 937 has a single or a plurality of antenna elements (for example, a plurality of antenna elements constituting a MIMO antenna), and is used for transmission / reception of a radio signal by the radio communication interface 933.
- the car navigation device 920 may include a plurality of antennas 937 as shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 29 illustrates an example in which the car navigation apparatus 920 includes a plurality of antennas 937, but the car navigation apparatus 920 may include a single antenna 937.
- the car navigation device 920 may include an antenna 937 for each wireless communication method.
- the antenna switch 936 may be omitted from the configuration of the car navigation device 920.
- the battery 938 supplies power to each block of the car navigation apparatus 920 shown in FIG. 29 via a power supply line partially shown by a broken line in the drawing. Further, the battery 938 stores electric power supplied from the vehicle side.
- the car navigation device 920 includes a module including a part (for example, the BB processor 934) or the whole of the wireless communication interface 933 and / or the processor 921, and the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 in the module. May be implemented.
- the module is a program for causing the processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 (in other words, a program for causing the processor to execute the operation of the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243).
- the program may be executed.
- a program for causing a processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 is installed in the car navigation device 920, and the wireless communication interface 933 (for example, the BB processor 934) and / or the processor 921 The program may be executed.
- the car navigation device 920 or the module may be provided as a device including the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243, and the processor functions as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243.
- a program may be provided.
- a readable recording medium in which the program is recorded may be provided.
- the radio communication unit 220 described with reference to FIG. 9 may be implemented in the radio communication interface 933 (for example, the RF circuit 935).
- the antenna unit 210 may be mounted on the antenna 937.
- the technology according to the present disclosure may be realized as an in-vehicle system (or vehicle) 940 including one or more blocks of the car navigation device 920 described above, an in-vehicle network 941, and a vehicle side module 942. That is, the in-vehicle system (or vehicle) 940 may be provided as a device including the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243.
- the vehicle-side module 942 generates vehicle-side data such as vehicle speed, engine speed, or failure information, and outputs the generated data to the in-vehicle network 941.
- the base station 100 uses the first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for the UL and the UL band is The switching unit 151 that switches the operation mode for the UL band between the second mode used for both DL and UL by the division, and the DL reception timing for the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band And a control unit 153 that issues an instruction for the first TA as a reference and an instruction for the second TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band.
- the base station 100 includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL, and a second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- a control unit 153 that synchronizes the DL transmission timing for the band.
- the terminal device 200 includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL, and a second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- Information acquisition unit 241 for acquiring information indicating the switching of the operation mode for the UL band between, and when the operation mode is the first mode, processing for UL transmission in the UL band is performed.
- a control unit 243 that performs processing for DL reception and DL transmission in the UL band when the operation mode is the second mode. The control unit 243 determines whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode based on the DL reception timing for the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band. The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted.
- the UL band of the FDD when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
- the UL band of FDD when the UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station is realized.
- the base station 100 uses the FDD UL band for the UL, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
- a switching unit 151 that switches an operation mode for the UL band between the second mode and a subframe that transmits ACK / NACK for DL data when the operation mode is the second mode.
- a control unit 153 for notifying the terminal device 200 of the information regarding.
- the UL band of the FDD when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
- the UL band of FDD when the UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in time division, ACK / NACK for DL data is appropriately transmitted.
- the system including the base station and the terminal device is a system compliant with LTE, LTE-Advanced, or a communication standard based on these has been described, the present disclosure is not limited to such an example.
- the system may be a system that complies with other communication standards.
- processing steps in the processing of the present specification do not necessarily have to be executed in time series according to the order described in the flowchart or the sequence diagram.
- the processing steps in the processing may be executed in an order different from the order described as a flowchart or a sequence diagram, or may be executed in parallel.
- a processor for example, a CPU, a DSP, or the like
- a device of the present specification for example, a base station, a base station device, a module for a base station device, or a terminal device or a module for a terminal device
- a computer program for functioning as a component of the device for example, a switching unit and / or a control unit, or an information acquisition unit and / or a control unit
- the processor executes the operation of the component of the device
- a computer program can be created.
- a recording medium on which the computer program is recorded may be provided.
- An apparatus for example, a base station, a base station apparatus, a module for a base station apparatus, a terminal apparatus, or a device including a memory for storing the computer program and one or more processors capable of executing the computer program
- a module for a terminal device may also be provided.
- a method including the operation of the components of the device for example, the switching unit and / or the control unit or the information acquisition unit and / or the control unit is also included in the technology according to the present disclosure.
- a switching unit for switching an operation mode for the uplink band An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band
- a control unit for instructing timing advance A device comprising: (2) The control unit performs the instruction for the first timing advance and the instruction for the second timing advance when the operation mode is the second mode. Equipment.
- the instruction for the first timing advance and the instruction for the second timing advance are instructions to the same terminal device that supports the second mode.
- the device described in 1. (4) The apparatus according to (3), wherein the control unit performs the instruction for the first timing advance and the instruction for the second timing advance in response to a notification of a timing advance command.
- the timing advance command includes a timing advance command for the first timing advance and a timing advance command for the second timing advance.
- the timing advance command for the first timing advance is a command for a first timing advance group;
- the timing advance command for the second timing advance is a command for a second timing advance group different from the first timing advance group.
- the control unit gives an instruction for one of the first timing advance and the second timing advance in response to the notification of the timing advance command, and the first timing advance and the second timing advance
- the apparatus according to any one of (3) to (6), wherein an instruction for the other of the first timing advance and the second timing advance is given by notification of information indicating an offset between the first timing advance and the second timing advance .
- the instruction for the first timing advance is an instruction to a first terminal device that does not support the second mode;
- the instruction for the second timing advance is an instruction to a second terminal device that supports the second mode.
- the apparatus according to (1) or (2).
- the first terminal device is a terminal device that adjusts uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on downlink reception timing for the downlink band
- the second terminal apparatus adjusts an uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode.
- the apparatus according to (8) above.
- the control unit according to any one of (1) to (9), wherein when the operation mode is the second mode, the control unit performs a process for transmitting a synchronization signal in the uplink band.
- the control unit transmits the synchronization signal in the uplink band so that the synchronization signal is transmitted in the predetermined subframe of a radio frame when the operation mode is the second mode. Do the processing for, The apparatus according to (10) above. (12) Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band A switching unit for switching the operation mode for When the operation mode is the second mode, a control unit that synchronizes the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band When, A device comprising: (13) The uplink reception timing for the uplink band is at least a predetermined time earlier than the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band when at least the operation mode is the second mode.
- the uplink reception timing for the uplink band is synchronized with the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band when the operation mode is the first mode, and the operation mode is the second mode.
- the predetermined time earlier than the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band The control unit may increase the timing advance of uplink transmission in the uplink band by the predetermined time in response to the switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode. Give instructions about the The device according to (13) or (14).
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band; When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission; With The control unit is based on a downlink reception timing for a FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode. Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band, apparatus.
- the uplink band Switching the operation mode about An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band Giving instructions about timing advance, Including methods.
- the uplink band Switching the operation mode about An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band Giving instructions about timing advance, A program that causes a processor to execute.
- the uplink band Switching the operation mode about An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band Giving instructions about timing advance,
- a readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
- the uplink band Switching the operation mode about Synchronizing the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode; , Including methods.
- the uplink band Switching the operation mode about Synchronizing the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode; , A program that causes a processor to execute.
- the uplink band Switching the operation mode about Synchronizing the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode; , A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
- the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
- the uplink is based on the downlink reception timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band. Adjusting the uplink transmission timing for the bandwidth, Including methods.
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
- the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
- the uplink is based on the downlink reception timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band. Adjusting the uplink transmission timing for the bandwidth, A program that causes a processor to execute.
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
- the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
- the uplink is based on the downlink reception timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band. Adjusting the uplink transmission timing for the bandwidth,
- a readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band; When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission; With The control unit, when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band On the basis of the information indicating the first timing advance based on the uplink transmission timing for the uplink band, or the downlink reception timing for the uplink band and the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on information indicating a second timing advance based on the downlink reception timing; apparatus.
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
- the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
- the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band are used as a reference.
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
- the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
- the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band are used as a reference.
- the uplink transmission timing for the uplink band is adjusted based on the information indicating one timing advance, or the downlink reception timing for the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on information indicating a second timing advance based on A program that causes a processor to execute.
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
- the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
- the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band are used as a reference.
- the uplink transmission timing for the uplink band is adjusted based on the information indicating one timing advance, or the downlink reception timing for the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on information indicating a second timing advance based on A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band; When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission; With The control unit indicates a downlink advance timing for the uplink band and a timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode. Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on the information, apparatus.
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
- the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
- the operation mode is the second mode, based on downlink reception timing for the uplink band and information indicating timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink bandwidth; Including methods.
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
- the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
- the operation mode is the second mode, based on downlink reception timing for the uplink band and information indicating timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink bandwidth;
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
- the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
- the operation mode is the second mode, based on downlink reception timing for the uplink band and information indicating timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink bandwidth;
- a readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
- the following configurations also belong to the technical scope of the present disclosure.
- a switching unit for switching an operation mode for the uplink band;
- a control unit for notifying a terminal device of information on a subframe for transmitting ACK (Acknowledgement) / NACK (Negative Acknowledgement) for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
- a device comprising: (2) The apparatus according to (1), wherein the downlink data includes downlink data transmitted in a downlink band of FDD corresponding to the uplink band.
- the control unit changes an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates when the operation mode is the second mode,
- the subframe is an uplink subframe common among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
- the apparatus according to any one of (1) to (3).
- the subframe is a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data defined for a first uplink / downlink configuration candidate of the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
- Frame The information is information indicating the first uplink / downlink configuration candidate.
- the first uplink / downlink configuration candidate is an uplink / downlink configuration candidate having a minimum number of uplink subframes among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
- the control unit notifies the terminal device of other information related to a subframe in which ACK / NACK for uplink data is transmitted when the operation mode is the second mode, (1) to (6) The apparatus according to any one of (1).
- the control unit changes an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates when the operation mode is the second mode,
- the subframe transmitting ACK / NACK for the uplink data is a downlink subframe common among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
- the subframe transmitting an ACK / NACK for the uplink data is defined as an uplink defined for a second uplink / downlink configuration candidate among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
- ACK / NACK subframe for link data The other information is information indicating the second uplink / downlink configuration candidate.
- the apparatus according to (9) above.
- the second uplink / downlink configuration candidate is an uplink / downlink configuration candidate having a minimum number of downlink subframes among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
- (12) The device according to any one of (1) to (11), wherein the control unit notifies the terminal device of the information by individual signaling.
- (13) The device according to any one of (1) to (12), wherein the control unit notifies the terminal device of the information in the system information.
- the control unit notifies the terminal apparatus of information indicating an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band.
- the uplink band Switching the operation mode about Notifying the terminal device of information regarding subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode; Including methods.
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band; When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission; With The acquisition unit acquires information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode, The control unit performs processing for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data based on the information on the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode.
- the downlink data includes downlink data transmitted in a downlink band of an FDD corresponding to the uplink band.
- the downlink data further includes downlink data transmitted in the uplink band.
- the acquisition unit acquires other information related to a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for uplink data when the operation mode is the second mode,
- the control unit performs processing for reception of ACK / NACK for uplink data based on the other information regarding the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode.
- the apparatus according to any one of (16) to (18).
- the subframe transmitting ACK / NACK for the uplink data is a downlink subframe common among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates for the uplink band;
- the control unit controls measurement of the uplink band based on the other information;
- the apparatus according to (19) above.
- (21) Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about Notifying the terminal device of information regarding subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
- the uplink band Switching the operation mode about Notifying the terminal device of information regarding subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
- a readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
- the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
- the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
- a program that causes a processor to execute.
- the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
- the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
- a readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
ãæ¬é瀺ã¯ãè£ çœ®ã«é¢ããã This disclosure relates to an apparatus.
ãè¿å¹Žãã¹ããŒããã©ã³ã®æ®åã«ãããç§»åäœéä¿¡ãããã¯ãŒã¯ã«ããããã©ãã£ãã¯ãæ¥å¢ããŠãããå Žæåã³ïŒåã¯æé垯ã«ãã£ãŠãããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ïŒdownlinkïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒã®ãã©ãã£ãã¯ãšã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒuplinkïŒïŒµïŒ¬ïŒã®ãã©ãã£ãã¯ã®æ¯çãå€åããããã®ããããã©ãã£ãã¯ã«å¿ããŠãã®ããã®ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ã®éãšãã®ããã®ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ã®éãšãæè»ã«èª¿æŽããããšã«ãããç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ãå¹ççã«äœ¿çšããããšãæãŸããã In recent years, with the spread of smartphones, traffic in mobile communication networks has increased rapidly. Depending on the location and / or time zone, the ratio of downlink (DL) traffic to uplink (UL) traffic varies. Therefore, it is desired to use radio resources efficiently by flexibly adjusting the amount of radio resources for DL and the amount of radio resources for UL according to traffic.
ãïŒLongãTermãEvolutionïŒã§ã¯ãè€ä¿¡æ¹åŒãšããŠãïŒFrequencyãDivisionãDuplexïŒåã³ïŒŽïŒ€ïŒ€ïŒTimeãDivisionãDuplexïŒããµããŒããããŠãããã§ã¯ããã©ãã£ãã¯ã«å¿ããŠãïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãåçã«å€æŽããããšã«ãããç¡ç·ãã¬ãŒã ã«ããããµããã¬ãŒã ãšïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšã®æ¯çã倿Žããããšãã§ãããå³ã¡ãã§ã¯ãã®ããã®ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ã®éãšãã®ããã®ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ã®éãšãæè»ã«èª¿æŽããããšãã§ãããäžæ¹ãã§ã¯ã垯åãšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãšãäºã決ãŸã£ãŠããã®ã§ãã®ããã®ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ã®éãšãã®ããã®ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ã®éãšãæè»ã«èª¿æŽããããšãã§ããªããã«ãããŠãããå€ãã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åãšããå°ãªã垯åããã£ãªã¢ã¢ã°ãªã²ãŒã·ã§ã³ã«ãã䜿çšããããšãå¯èœã§ããããçµæãšããŠã垯åã®ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ã®äœ¿çšçãäžãããç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ãå¹ççã«äœ¿çšããããšã¯èšããªãã LTE (Long Term Evolution) supports FDD (Frequency Division Duplex) and TDD (Time Division Duplex) as duplex methods. In TDD, the UL / DL configuration ratio in a radio frame can be changed by dynamically changing the UL / DL configuration according to traffic. That is, in TDD, the amount of radio resources for DL and the amount of radio resources for UL can be flexibly adjusted. On the other hand, in FDD, since the DL band and the UL band are determined in advance, the amount of radio resources for DL and the amount of radio resources for UL cannot be flexibly adjusted. In FDD, it is possible to use more DL bands and fewer UL bands by carrier aggregation, but as a result, the usage rate of radio resources in the UL band decreases and radio resources are used efficiently. I can't say that.
ãããã§ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããææ³ãæ€èšãããŠãããåœè©²ææ³ã¯ããã¬ãã·ãã«ãã¥ãã¬ã¯ã¹ïŒFlexibleãDuplexïŒãšåŒã°ãåŸããäŸãã°ãç¹èš±æç®ïŒã«ã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã¢ãŒãã§äœ¿çšããæè¡ãé瀺ãããŠããã
Therefore, a method of using the FDD UL band for both DL and UL in a time division manner has been studied. This method can be referred to as Flexible Duplex. For example,
ãããããã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«ã¯ãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¯å¥œã«è¡ãããªãå¯èœæ§ãããã However, when the FDD UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication may not be performed well in the UL band.
ãããã§ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«åœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãããšãå¯èœã«ããä»çµã¿ãæäŸãããããšãæãŸããã Therefore, it is desirable to provide a mechanism that enables better wireless communication in the UL band when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner.
ãæ¬é瀺ã«ããã°ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãäžèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãäžèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããåæ¿éšãšãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒAcknowledgementïŒïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒNegativeãAcknowledgementïŒãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ å ±ãã端æ«è£ 眮ã«éç¥ããå¶åŸ¡éšãšããåããè£ çœ®ãæäŸãããã According to the present disclosure, between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division. And a switching unit for switching the operation mode for the uplink band, and a subframe for transmitting ACK (Acknowledgement) / NACK (Negative Acknowledgement) for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode. And a control unit that notifies the terminal device of information.
ããŸããæ¬é瀺ã«ããã°ãããã»ããµã«ãããã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãäžèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãäžèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããããšãšãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ å ±ãã端æ«è£ 眮ã«éç¥ããããšãšããå«ãæ¹æ³ãæäŸãããã Further, according to the present disclosure, the processor uses a first mode in which the FDD uplink band is used for the uplink, and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division. Switching the operation mode for the uplink band between the mode and the information on the subframe for transmitting the ACK / NACK for the downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode, Informing the terminal device.
ããŸããæ¬é瀺ã«ããã°ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãäžèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãäžèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ããç€ºãæ å ±ãååŸããååŸéšãšãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãå¶åŸ¡éšãšããåããè£ çœ®ãæäŸããããäžèšååŸéšã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ å ±ãååŸããäžèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããäžèšæ å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãã Further, according to the present disclosure, a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink, and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for the uplink band between, and for the uplink transmission in the uplink band when the operation mode is the first mode An apparatus is provided that includes a control unit that performs processing and performs processing for downlink reception and uplink transmission in the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode. The acquisition unit acquires information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode, and the control unit acquires the second operation mode when the operation mode is the second mode. In the mode, processing for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data is performed based on the information on the subframe.
ã以äžèª¬æããããã«æ¬é瀺ã«ããã°ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«åœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãããšãå¯èœã«ãªãããªããäžèšã®å¹æã¯å¿ ãããéå®çãªãã®ã§ã¯ãªããäžèšå¹æãšãšãã«ãåã¯äžèšå¹æã«ä»£ããŠãæ¬æçŽ°æžã«ç€ºãããããããã®å¹æãåã¯æ¬æçްæžããææ¡ããåŸãä»ã®å¹æãå¥ãããŠãããã As described above, according to the present disclosure, when the FDD UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band. The above effects are not necessarily limited, and any of the effects shown in the present specification or other effects that can be grasped from the present specification are exhibited together with or in place of the above effects. May be.
ã以äžã«æ·»ä»ã®å³é¢ãåç §ããªãããæ¬é瀺ã®å¥œé©ãªå®æœã®åœ¢æ ã«ã€ããŠè©³çްã«èª¬æããããªããæ¬æçްæžåã³å³é¢ã«ãããŠãå®è³ªçã«åäžã®æ©èœæ§æãæããæ§æèŠçŽ ã«ã€ããŠã¯ãåäžã®ç¬Šå·ãä»ããããšã«ããéè€èª¬æãçç¥ããã Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present disclosure will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. In addition, in this specification and drawing, about the component which has the substantially same function structure, duplication description is abbreviate | omitted by attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol.
ããªãã説æã¯ä»¥äžã®é åºã§è¡ããã®ãšããã
ãïŒïŒã¯ããã«
ãïŒïŒã·ã¹ãã ã®æŠç¥çãªæ§æ
ãïŒïŒåè£
çœ®ã®æ§æ
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒåºå°å±ã®æ§æ
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒç«¯æ«è£
çœ®ã®æ§æ
ãïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡ç課é¡
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡çç¹åŸŽ
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒåŠçã®æµã
ãïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡ç課é¡
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡çç¹åŸŽ
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒåŠçã®æµã
ãïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡ç課é¡
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡çç¹åŸŽ
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒåŠçã®æµã
ãïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡ç課é¡
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡çç¹åŸŽ
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒåŠçã®æµã
ãïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡ç課é¡
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡çç¹åŸŽ
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒåŠçã®æµã
ãïŒïŒå¿çšäŸ
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒåºå°å±ã«é¢ããå¿çšäŸ
ããïŒïŒïŒïŒç«¯æ«è£
眮ã«é¢ããå¿çšäŸ
ãïŒïŒïŒãŸãšã
The description will be made in the following order.
1. 1.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã«ïŒïŒ
ãã¯ããã«ãå³ïŒïœå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠãéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®èª¿æŽãåã³ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒAcknowledgementïŒïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒNegativeãAcknowledgementïŒã®éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã説æããã
<< 1. Introduction >>
First, the UL transmission timing adjustment and the transmission timing of ACK (Acknowledgement) / NACK (Negative Acknowledgement) will be described with reference to FIGS.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®èª¿æŽ
ãïŒïœïŒã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ïŒTimingãAdvanceïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ
ãåºå°å±ïŒäŸãã°ãïœ
ïŒevolvedãNodeãBïŒïŒãšç«¯æ«è£
眮ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒUserãEquipmentïŒïŒãšã®éã®è·é¢åã³äŒæ¬é
å»¶ã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ã«ãã£ãŠç°ãªãããã®ãããè€æ°ã®ç«¯æ«è£
眮ããã®ïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ã®åºå°å±ã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåæããããã«ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ç«¯æ«è£
眮ã®åã
ã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ã¯ãã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ã«éç¥ãã端æ«è£
眮ã¯ãåœè©²ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã«åºã¥ããŠãéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽïŒadjustïŒããã
(1) UL transmission timing adjustment (a) Timing Advance (TA)
The distance and propagation delay between a base station (for example, eNB (evolved Node B)) and a terminal device (for example, UE (User Equipment)) vary depending on the terminal device. Therefore, the UL transmission timing of each of the plurality of terminal devices is adjusted so that the reception timings of the UL signals from the plurality of terminal devices are synchronized. More specifically, for example, the base station notifies the terminal device of a timing advance (TA) command, and the terminal device adjusts the UL transmission timing based on the TA command.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ã®åæå€
ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹ããªã¢ã³ãã«ãéä¿¡ãããšãåºå°å±ã¯ãïŒäŸãã°ãïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã瀺ãã³ãã³ããå«ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹ã¬ã¹ãã³ã¹ãäžèšç«¯æ«è£
眮ãžéä¿¡ããããããŠãäžèšç«¯æ«è£
眮ã¯ãããïŒïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒãç®åºããããããŠãäžèšç«¯æ«è£
眮ã¯ãåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšããšã«åºã¥ããŠãéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã
(A-1) Initial value of TA For example, when a terminal device transmits a random access preamble, the base station sends a random access response including a TA command indicating T A (eg, T A = 0 to 1282) to the terminal device. Send to. Then, the terminal device calculates the N TA (N TA = T A * 16) from T A. Then, the terminal device includes a DL reception timing, based on the N TA, to adjust the UL transmission timing.
ãã®ã±ãŒã¹ã§ã¯ãïŒå³ã¡ãéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšã®ã®å·®åïŒã¯ãïŒïŒŽïŒ³ã§ãããã¯ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãã€ã¯ãç§ïŒïœïœïŒã§ããã In FDD case, TA (i.e., the difference of the UL transmission timing and DL reception timing) is a N TA * T S. T S is a 1 / 30.72 microseconds (us).
ãäžæ¹ãã®ã±ãŒã¹ã§ã¯ãã¯ãïŒïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒŽïŒ³ã§ãããïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒŽïŒ³ã®ãªãã»ããã¯ãåºå°å±ã«ãããåä¿¡ããéä¿¡ãžã®åæ¿ãã蚱容ããããã®ãã®ã§ããã On the other hand, in the case of TDD, TA is (N TA +624) * T S. Offset of 624 * T S is for allowing the switch to DL transmission from UL reception at the base station.
ããã®ããã«ãããïŒã€ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãå°ãããã®ã§ãã¯ããç€ºãæ å ±ã§ãããšèšããã Thus, since one TA is derived from the N TA, N TA can be said to be information indicating the TA.
ãïŒaïŒïŒïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ã®æŽæ°
ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹åŠçåŸã«ã¯ãåºå°å±ã¯ãïŒŽïŒ¡ã®æŽæ°ã®ããã«ãïŒäŸãã°ãïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã瀺ãã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ã«éç¥ããããããŠãäžèšç«¯æ«è£
眮ã¯ãïŒïœïœïœåã³ïŒŽïŒ¡ãããïŒïŒ®ïœ
ïœïŒïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒïŒ®ïœ
ïœïŒïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒïœïœïœïŒïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãç®åºããããããŠãäžèšç«¯æ«è£
眮ã¯ãåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãïŒïŒ®ïœ
ïœãšã«åºã¥ããŠãéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã
(A-2) TA Update After the random access processing, the base station notifies the terminal device of a TA command indicating T A (eg, T A = 0 to 63) for TA update. Then, the terminal device, the N TA, old and T A, calculates N TA, New (N TA, New = N TA, old + (T A -31) * 16) a. And the said terminal device adjusts UL transmission timing based on DL reception timing and NTA, New .
ãïŒaïŒïŒïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ã®äŸ
ãå³ïŒã¯ãã®ã±ãŒã¹ã«ãããã®äžäŸã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒãåç
§ãããšãã®ã±ãŒã¹ã«ãããåºå°å±åã³ç«¯æ«è£
眮ã®éåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã瀺ãããŠãããäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ã§ã¯ãéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšïŒµïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåæããŠãããæèšãããšãåœè©²åºå°å±ã§ã¯ããã¬ãŒã ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšïŒµïŒ¬ãã¬ãŒã ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåæããŠãããäžæ¹ãäŒæ¬é
å»¶ã«èµ·å ããŠã端æ«è£
眮ã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšåºå°å±ã«ãããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããé
ããäžèšç«¯æ«è£
眮ã«ãããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšåºå°å±ã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããæ©ããäžèšç«¯æ«è£
眮ã«ãããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšç«¯æ«è£
眮ã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ããããïŒïŒã ãæ©ãã
(A-3) Example of TA FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of TA in the FDD case. Referring to FIG. 1, transmission / reception timings of a base station and a terminal device in the FDD case are shown. For example, in the base station, the DL transmission timing and the UL reception timing are synchronized. In other words, in the base station, the DL frame timing and the UL frame timing are synchronized. On the other hand, due to the propagation delay, the DL reception timing in the terminal device is later than the DL transmission timing in the base station, and the UL transmission timing in the terminal device is earlier than the UL reception timing in the base station. The UL transmission timing in the terminal device is earlier by TA91 than the DL reception timing in the terminal device.
ãå³ïŒã¯ãã®ã±ãŒã¹ã«ãããã®äžäŸã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒãåç
§ãããšãã®ã±ãŒã¹ã«ãããåºå°å±åã³ç«¯æ«è£
眮ã®éåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã瀺ãããŠãããã®ã±ãŒã¹ã§ããäŒæ¬é
å»¶ã«èµ·å ããŠã端æ«è£
眮ã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãåºå°å±ã«ãããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããé
ããäžèšç«¯æ«è£
眮ã«ãããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšåºå°å±ã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããæ©ããäžèšç«¯æ«è£
眮ã«ãããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšç«¯æ«è£
眮ã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ïŒïŒããããïŒïŒã ãæ©ãããªããåºå°å±ã«ãããŠãåä¿¡ããéä¿¡ãžã®åæ¿ãã«ãæéïŒïŒãèŠãããåæ§ã«ã端æ«è£
眮ã«ãããŠããåä¿¡ããéä¿¡ãžã®åæ¿ãã«ãæéïŒïŒãèŠããã
FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of TA in the TDD case. Referring to FIG. 2, transmission / reception timings of the base station and the terminal device in the TDD case are shown. Even in the case of TDD, due to the propagation delay, the DL reception timing in the terminal apparatus is later than the DL transmission timing in the base station, and the UL transmission timing in the terminal apparatus is earlier than the UL reception timing in the base station. The UL transmission timing in the terminal device is earlier by TA93 than the
ãïŒïœïŒã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã°ã«ãŒãïŒTimingãAdvanceãGroupïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ§ïŒ
ã端æ«è£
眮ã¯ããã£ãªã¢ã¢ã°ãªã²ãŒã·ã§ã³ã«ãããæå€§ïŒã€ã®ã³ã³ããŒãã³ããã£ãªã¢ïŒComponentãCarrierïŒïŒ£ïŒ£ïŒãåæã«äœ¿çšããããšãã§ããã端æ«è£
眮ã¯ãåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠããã©ã€ããªã»ã«ã®ïŒ°ïŒµïŒ£ïŒ£ïŒšïŒPhysicalãUplinkãControlãChannelïŒïŒïŒ°ïŒµïŒ³ïŒ£ïŒšïŒPhysicalãUplinkãSharedãChannelïŒïŒïŒ³ïŒ²ïŒ³ïŒSoundingãReferenceãSignalïŒã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽãããããã«ã端æ«è£
眮ã¯ãåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãã»ã«ã³ããªã»ã«ã®ïŒ°ïŒµïŒ³ïŒ£ïŒšïŒïŒ³ïŒ²ïŒ³ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã
(B) Timing Advance Group (TAG)
The terminal device can use up to five component carriers (CC) simultaneously by carrier aggregation. The terminal apparatus adjusts the UL transmission timing for PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) / PUSCH (Physical Uplink Shared Channel) / SRS (Sounding Reference Signal) of the primary cell based on the DL reception timing and the information indicating TA. To do. Furthermore, a terminal device adjusts UL transmission timing about PUSCH / SRS of a secondary cell based on DL reception timing and information indicating TA.
ãäŸãã°ãåäžã®åºå°å±ããåæããè€æ°ã®ïŒ£ïŒ£ã䜿çšããå Žåã«ã¯ãåœè©²è€æ°ã®ïŒ£ïŒ£ã«å ±éã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã䜿çšãããããã®å Žåã«ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒ£ïŒ£ã¯ãåäžã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã°ã«ãŒãïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ§ïŒã«å±ããäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã¯ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ§ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã§ããã端æ«è£ 眮ã¯ãè€æ°ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ§ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã管çããã端æ«è£ 眮ã¯ãããã«å±ããã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ããåœè©²ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«åºã¥ããŠèª¿æŽãããã³ãã³ãïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒMediumãAccessãControlïŒã³ã³ãããŒã«ãšã¬ã¡ã³ãã¯ãïŒãããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ§ããåã³ïŒãããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ããå«ãã For example, when the same base station uses a plurality of synchronized CCs, a common TA is used for the plurality of CCs. In this case, the plurality of CCs belong to the same timing advance group (TAG), and the TA is a TA of this TAG. The terminal device manages TAs of a plurality of TAGs. The terminal device adjusts the UL transmission timing for a CC belonging to a certain TAG based on the TA of the certain TAG. The TA command MAC (Medium Access Control) control element includes a 2-bit TAG ID and a 6-bit TA command.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡
ãïŒïœïŒïŒŠïŒ€ïŒ€
ãïŒïŒ¬ïŒŽïŒ¥ã§ã¯ãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ãéä¿¡ããããµããã¬ãŒã ã®ïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åŸã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããã以äžããã®ç¹ã«ã€ããŠå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠå
·äœäŸã説æããã
(2) Transmission of ACK / NACK (a) FDD
In FDD-LTE, ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted in a subframe four subframes after the subframe in which the DL data is transmitted. Hereinafter, a specific example of this point will be described with reference to FIG.
ãå³ïŒã¯ãïŒïŒ¬ïŒŽïŒ¥ã«ãããïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®äžäŸã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒãåç §ãããšãã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšã瀺ãããŠãããäŸãã°ãããŒã¿ãããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããåæ§ã«ãããŒã¿ãããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ãããã FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK in FDD-LTE. Referring to FIG. 3, a subframe of the FDD DL band and a subframe of the FDD UL band are shown. For example, when DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 0, ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 4. Similarly, when DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 1, ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 5.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒŽïŒ€ïŒ€
ãã®ã±ãŒã¹ã§ã¯ãããŒã¿ãéä¿¡ããããµããã¬ãŒã ã®ïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åŸã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§ãããšã¯éããªãããã®ãããã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ããšã«ãããŒã¿ãéä¿¡ããããµããã¬ãŒã ãšãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããããµããã¬ãŒã ãšã®å¯Ÿå¿ããïŒïŒ§ïŒ°ïŒ°ïŒThirdãGenerationãPartnershipãProjectïŒãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãïœïœïœïœ
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠèŠå®ãããŠããã以äžãå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠãã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®äŸã説æããã
(B) TDD
In the case of TDD, a subframe four subframes after a subframe in which DL data is transmitted is not necessarily a UL subframe. Therefore, for each TDD UL / DL configuration, the correspondence between the DL subframe in which DL data is transmitted and the UL subframe in which ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted is 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project). It is specified in TS36.213 Table 10.1.3.3.1-1. Hereinafter, an example of the UL / DL configuration of TDD will be described with reference to FIG.
ãå³ïŒã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®äŸã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒãåç
§ãããšãã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãšããŠãã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒïœïŒã瀺ãããŠããããã®ããã«ãã§ã¯ãã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã«ãã£ãŠããµããã¬ãŒã åã³ïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã®æ°åã³é
眮ãç°ãªãããªããã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒïœïŒã¯ãïŒïŒ§ïŒ°ïŒ°ããïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«å«ãŸããïœïœïœïœ
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããŠãããã®ãšåãã§ããã
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the TDD UL / DL configuration. Referring to FIG. 4,
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã·ã¹ãã ã®æŠç¥çãªæ§æïŒïŒ
ãç¶ããŠãå³ïŒïœå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠãæ¬é瀺ã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãã·ã¹ãã ïŒã®æŠç¥çãªæ§æã説æãããå³ïŒã¯ãæ¬å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãã·ã¹ãã ïŒã®æŠç¥çãªæ§æã®äžäŸã瀺ã説æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒãåç
§ãããšãã·ã¹ãã ïŒã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒåã³ç«¯æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãã
<< 2. Schematic configuration of system >>
Next, a schematic configuration of the
ãïŒïŒïŒåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç§»åäœéä¿¡ã·ã¹ãã ïŒåã¯ã»ã«ã©ãŒã·ã¹ãã ïŒã®åºå°å±ã§ãããäžäŸãšããŠãåœè©²ç§»åäœéä¿¡ã·ã¹ãã ã¯ããïŒïŒ¡ïœïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœãåã¯ãããã«æºããéä¿¡èŠæ Œã«æºæ ããã·ã¹ãã ã§ãããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããµããŒãããã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯ååã³ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã䜿çšããŠãïŒã»ã«ïŒïŒïŒå
ã«äœçœ®ããïŒç«¯æ«è£
眮ãšã®ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ããäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã¯ãã®ã³ã³ããŒãã³ããã£ãªã¢ïŒïŒ£ïŒ£ïŒã§ãããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã¯ãã®ïŒ£ïŒ£ã§ããã
(1)
ããšããããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããã
In particular, the
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠç«¯æ«è£
眮ãžã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠç«¯æ«è£
眮ããã®ïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãåä¿¡ããã
For example, when the operation mode is the first mode, the
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠç«¯æ«è£
眮ãžã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããããã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ç«¯æ«è£
眮ãžã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããããŸããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒµïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ç«¯æ«è£
眮ããã®ïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãåä¿¡ããã
For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the
ãïŒïŒïŒç«¯æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒ
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç§»åäœéä¿¡ã·ã¹ãã ïŒåã¯ã»ã«ã©ãŒã·ã¹ãã ïŒã«ãããŠéä¿¡å¯èœãªç«¯æ«è£
眮ã§ããããšããããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããµããŒãããã
(2)
The
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒããã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãåä¿¡ããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒãžã®ïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããã
For example, when the operation mode is the first mode, the
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒããã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãåä¿¡ããããã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§åºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒããã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãåä¿¡ããããŸãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒµïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§åºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒãžã®ïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããã
For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒšïœ
ïœïŒ®ïœ
ïœ
ãïŒïœïŒãã¯ãã»ã«ã®ã±ãŒã¹
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã¯ãã»ã«ã®åºå°å±ã§ãããå³ã¡ãã»ã«ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã¯ãã»ã«ã§ããã以äžããã®ç¹ã«ã€ããŠå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠãå
·äœäŸã説æããã
(3) HetNet
(A) Case of Macro Cell For example, the
ãå³ïŒã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒããã¯ãã»ã«ã®åºå°å±ã§ããã±ãŒã¹ã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒãåç
§ãããšãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒåã³ç«¯æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã瀺ãããŠããããã®äŸã§ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã¯ãã»ã«ã®åºå°å±ã§ãããã»ã«ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¹ã¢ãŒã«ã»ã«ïŒïŒãšéãªããã¯ãã»ã«ã§ãããäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¹ã¢ãŒã«ã»ã«ïŒïŒå
ã«äœçœ®ããå Žåã«ãã¹ã¢ãŒã«ã»ã«ïŒïŒã®åºå°å±ïŒïŒãšã®ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãããšãå¯èœã§ããã
FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where the
ãïŒïœïŒã¹ã¢ãŒã«ã»ã«ã®ã±ãŒã¹
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¹ã¢ãŒã«ã»ã«ã®åºå°å±ã§ãã£ãŠããããå³ã¡ãã»ã«ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¹ã¢ãŒã«ã»ã«ã§ãã£ãŠãããã以äžããã®ç¹ã«ã€ããŠå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠãå
·äœäŸã説æããã
(B) Small Cell Case The
ãå³ïŒã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒãã¹ã¢ãŒã«ã»ã«ã®åºå°å±ã§ããã±ãŒã¹ã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒãåç
§ãããšãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒåã³ç«¯æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã瀺ãããŠããããã®äŸã§ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¹ã¢ãŒã«ã»ã«ã®åºå°å±ã§ãããã»ã«ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã¯ãã»ã«ïŒïŒãšéãªãã¹ã¢ãŒã«ã»ã«ã§ãããäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã¯ãã»ã«ïŒïŒå
ã«äœçœ®ããå Žåã«ããã¯ãã»ã«ïŒïŒã®åºå°å±ïŒïŒãšã®ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãããšãå¯èœã§ããã
FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where the
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒåè£
çœ®ã®æ§æïŒïŒ
ãç¶ããŠãå³ïŒïœå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠãæ¬é瀺ã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒåã³ç«¯æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®æ§æã説æãã
<< 3. Configuration of each device >>
Subsequently, the configurations of the
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒåºå°å±ã®æ§æïŒ
ããŸããå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠãæ¬é瀺ã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã®æ§æã®äžäŸã説æãããå³ïŒã¯ãæ¬é瀺ã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã®æ§æã®äžäŸã瀺ããããã¯å³ã§ãããå³ïŒãåç
§ãããšãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ã³ããéšïŒïŒïŒãç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒããããã¯ãŒã¯éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒãèšæ¶éšïŒïŒïŒåã³åŠçéšïŒïŒïŒãåããã
<3.1. Base station configuration>
First, an example of a configuration of the
ãïŒïŒïŒã¢ã³ããéšïŒïŒïŒ
ãã¢ã³ããéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã«ããåºåãããä¿¡å·ã黿³¢ãšããŠç©ºéã«æŸå°ããããŸããã¢ã³ããéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ã空éã®é»æ³¢ãä¿¡å·ã«å€æããåœè©²ä¿¡å·ãç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒãžåºåããã
(1)
The
ãïŒïŒïŒç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒ
ãç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãä¿¡å·ãéåä¿¡ãããäŸãã°ãç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ãžã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ãã端æ«è£
眮ããã®ïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãåä¿¡ããã
(2)
The
ãïŒïŒïŒãããã¯ãŒã¯éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒ
ããããã¯ãŒã¯éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãæ
å ±ãéåä¿¡ãããäŸãã°ããããã¯ãŒã¯éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãä»ã®ããŒããžã®æ
å ±ãéä¿¡ããä»ã®ããŒãããã®æ
å ±ãåä¿¡ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšä»ã®ããŒãã¯ãä»ã®åºå°å±åã³ã³ã¢ãããã¯ãŒã¯ããŒããå«ãã
(3)
The
ãïŒïŒïŒèšæ¶éšïŒïŒïŒ
ãèšæ¶éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã®åäœã®ããã®ããã°ã©ã åã³æ§ã
ãªããŒã¿ãäžæçã«åã¯æä¹
çã«èšæ¶ããã
(4)
The
ãïŒïŒïŒåŠçéšïŒïŒïŒ
ãåŠçéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã®æ§ã
ãªæ©èœãæäŸãããåŠçéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãå«ãããªããåŠçéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ããããã®æ§æèŠçŽ ä»¥å€ã®ä»ã®æ§æèŠçŽ ãããã«å«ã¿åŸããå³ã¡ãåŠçéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ããããã®æ§æèŠçŽ ã®åäœä»¥å€ã®åäœãè¡ãåŸãã
(5)
The
ãåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåŸã«è©³çްã«èª¬æããã
The
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒç«¯æ«è£
çœ®ã®æ§æïŒ
ããŸããå³ïŒåã³å³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠãæ¬é瀺ã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®æ§æã®äžäŸã説æãããå³ïŒã¯ãæ¬é瀺ã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®æ§æã®äžäŸã瀺ããããã¯å³ã§ãããå³ïŒãåç
§ãããšã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ã³ããéšïŒïŒïŒãç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒãèšæ¶éšïŒïŒïŒåã³åŠçéšïŒïŒïŒãåããã
<3.2. Configuration of terminal device>
First, an example of the configuration of the
ãïŒïŒïŒã¢ã³ããéšïŒïŒïŒ
ãã¢ã³ããéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã«ããåºåãããä¿¡å·ã黿³¢ãšããŠç©ºéã«æŸå°ããããŸããã¢ã³ããéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ã空éã®é»æ³¢ãä¿¡å·ã«å€æããåœè©²ä¿¡å·ãç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒãžåºåããã
(1)
The
ãïŒïŒïŒç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒ
ãç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãä¿¡å·ãéåä¿¡ãããäŸãã°ãç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåºå°å±ããã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãåä¿¡ããåºå°å±ãžã®ïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããã以äžãå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠãç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã«å«ãŸããããŒããŠã§ã¢ã®äžäŸã説æããã
(2)
The
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ãæ¬é瀺ã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã«å«ãŸããããŒããŠã§ã¢ã®äžäŸã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ãããšãç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã«å«ãŸããïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡åè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡åè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡åè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã瀺ãããŠããããŸããã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ããå±éšçºæ¯åšïŒlocalãoscillatorïŒïŒïŒïŒãåã³ãã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ããã®å±éšçºæ¯åšïŒïŒïŒã瀺ãããŠãããããã«ãã¢ã³ããéšïŒïŒïŒã«å«ãŸããã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒã瀺ãããŠãããäŸãã°ã垯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ã¯ãïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡åè·¯ïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒŠïŒ€ïŒ€ïŒïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡åè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãçšãããããäŸãã°ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒãããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ã¯ãïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡åè·¯ïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒŠïŒ€ïŒ€ïŒïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡åè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã«å ããŠãïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡åè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãçšãããããããå
·äœçã«ãæåå²ã§ãïŒïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡åè·¯ïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒŽïŒ€ïŒ€ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡åè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãçšããããã
FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of hardware included in the
ãïŒïŒïŒèšæ¶éšïŒïŒïŒ
ãèšæ¶éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®åäœã®ããã®ããã°ã©ã åã³æ§ã
ãªããŒã¿ãäžæçã«åã¯æä¹
çã«èšæ¶ããã
(3)
The
ãïŒïŒïŒåŠçéšïŒïŒïŒ
ãåŠçéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®æ§ã
ãªæ©èœãæäŸãããåŠçéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãå«ãããªããåŠçéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ããããã®æ§æèŠçŽ ä»¥å€ã®ä»ã®æ§æèŠçŽ ãããã«å«ã¿åŸããå³ã¡ãåŠçéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ããããã®æ§æèŠçŽ ã®åäœä»¥å€ã®åäœãè¡ãåŸãã
(4)
The
ãæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåŸã«è©³çްã«èª¬æããã
The
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ïŒïŒ
ãç¶ããŠãå³ïŒïŒïœå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠãæ¬é瀺ã®ç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã説æããã
<< 4. First Embodiment >>
Subsequently, a first embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡ç課é¡ïŒ
ããŸããå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãæè¡ç課é¡ã説æããã
<4.1. Technical issues>
First, a technical problem according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããææ³ãæ€èšãããŠãããåœè©²ææ³ã¯ããã¬ãã·ãã«ãã¥ãã¬ã¯ã¹ãšåŒã°ãåŸãã A method of using the FDD UL band for both DL and UL in a time division manner is being studied. This approach can be referred to as flexible duplex.
ãããããã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«ã¯ãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¯å¥œã«è¡ãããªãå¯èœæ§ãããã However, when the FDD UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication may not be performed well in the UL band.
ãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ã垯åã«ããããããžã®åæ¿ãã«èµ·å ããŠãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãé ããããã®çµæãã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšã®éã«ãããçãåŸãããã®ãããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããŠèª¿æŽãããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããŠèª¿æŽãããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšã¯ãç°ãªãåŸãããã£ãŠãåºå°å±ã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®åæãå®çŸãããªãå¯èœæ§ãããã以äžããã®ç¹ã«ã€ããŠå³ïŒïŒãåç §ããŠåæ¿ãã«èµ·å ããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®é å»¶ã®å ·äœäŸã説æããã More specifically, for example, due to switching from UL to DL in the UL band, the DL transmission timing for the UL band is delayed. As a result, there may be a difference between the DL transmission timing for the FDD DL band and the DL transmission timing for the UL band. For this reason, the UL transmission timing adjusted based on the DL reception timing for the DL band may be different from the UL transmission timing adjusted based on the DL reception timing for the UL band. Therefore, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station may not be realized. In the following, a specific example of the DL transmission timing delay caused by switching will be described with reference to FIG.
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ã垯åã«ããããšïŒ€ïŒ¬ãšã®åæ¿ãã«èµ·å ããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®é
å»¶ã®äžäŸã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ãããšãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã®åºå°å±ã«ãããéåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã®åœè©²åºå°å±ã«ãããéåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãã瀺ãããŠãããäŸãã°ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã¯ãäžèšåºå°å±ã«ãããŠïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšïŒµïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåæããŠãããäžæ¹ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ããããããžã®åæ¿ãã«æéïŒïŒãèŠãããããäžèšåºå°å±ã«ãããŠãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããé
ããããã®çµæã端æ«è£
眮ã§ããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããéããããã®ãããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããŠèª¿æŽãããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããŠèª¿æŽãããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšããç°ãªãããã£ãŠãåºå°å±ã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®åæãå®çŸãããªãå¯èœæ§ãããã
FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a delay in DL transmission timing caused by switching between UL and DL in the UL band. Referring to FIG. 11, the transmission / reception timing in the base station in the first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL, and the second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The transmission / reception timing in the base station is shown. For example, in the first mode, DL transmission timing and UL reception timing are synchronized in the base station. On the other hand, in the second mode, since
ãããã§ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«åœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãããšãå¯èœã«ããä»çµã¿ãæäŸãããããšãæãŸãããããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«åºå°å±ã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®åæãå®çŸããããšãå¯èœã«ããä»çµã¿ãæäŸãããããšãæãŸããã Therefore, it is desirable to provide a mechanism that enables better wireless communication in the UL band when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner. More specifically, for example, it is desirable to provide a mechanism that enables synchronization of UL reception timing in a base station when the UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner. .
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡çç¹åŸŽïŒ
ãæ¬¡ã«ãå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãæè¡çç¹åŸŽã説æããã
<4.2. Technical features>
Next, technical features according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
ãïŒïŒïŒåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ã
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããã
(1) Switching of operation mode The base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
ãïŒïœïŒåæ¿ãã®ããªã¬
ãäŸãã°ãã»ã«ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠïŒ€ïŒ¬ã®ãã©ãã£ãã¯ãã®ãã©ãã£ãã¯ãããååã«å€§ãããªããäžã€ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããµããŒããã端æ«è£
çœ®ã®æ°ãååã§ããã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã«åãæ¿ããã
(A) Switching trigger For example, if DL traffic in the
ãïŒïœïŒåæ¿ãååŸã§ã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã®ååŸã§ãéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ïŒæèšãããšããã¬ãŒã ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ïŒã倿Žããªããããã«ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããµããŒãããªã端æ«è£
眮ïŒä»¥äžããã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«ããšåŒã¶ïŒãžã®åœ±é¿ãããå°ããããããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã
(B) UL transmission timing before and after switching For example, the
ããªããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã«èµ·å ããé å»¶ã®åã ããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããé ããªãããã®ç¹ã«ã€ããŠã¯ãå³ïŒïŒãåç §ããŠèª¬æãããšããã§ããã In the second mode, the DL transmission timing for the UL band is later than the DL transmission timing for the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band by the delay caused by the switching of the operation mode. Become. This point is as described with reference to FIG.
ãïŒïœïŒåæ¿ãã®éç¥
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ïŒä»¥äžããã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ããšåŒã¶ïŒãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããã
(C) Notification of switching For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits information indicating the switching of the operation mode between the first mode and the second mode (hereinafter, âmode switching informationâ). To the
ãå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ïŒSystemãInformationïŒã®äžã§ãäžèšã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããããããã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžã®åå¥ã®ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã«ãããäžèšã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããŠããããäŸãã°ãåœè©²åå¥ã®ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã¯ãïŒRadioãResourceãControlïŒã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã§ãã£ãŠãããã
Specifically, for example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the
ãïŒïœïŒåæ¿ãã«å¿ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®åäœ
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ãååŸããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ãè¡ããäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡åã³ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ãè¡ãã
(D) Operation of
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããåä¿¡åã³ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãã
The
ãïŒïŒïŒã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€º
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ïŒtimingãadvanceïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãåã³ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ãã
(2) Instruction about timing advance In the first embodiment, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) determines the first timing advance (TA) based on the DL reception timing for the DL band. An instruction and an instruction for the second TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band are given.
ããšããã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºãåã³äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããµããŒãããåäžã®ç«¯æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžã®æç€ºã§ããã
In particular, in the first embodiment, the instruction for the first TA and the instruction for the second TA are instructions to the same
ãäžæ¹ã端æ«è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãç€ºãæ å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããããã¯ã端æ«è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãç€ºãæ å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã On the other hand, when the operation mode is the second mode, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) determines the UL reception based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA. The UL transmission timing for the band is adjusted. Alternatively, when the operation mode is the second mode, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243), based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA, The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted.
ãïŒïœïŒç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã®æç€º
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºãåã³äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºãè¡ãã
(A) Instruction in the second mode For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153), and the second instruction in the first TA and the second mode The above instructions for TAs are made.
ãïŒïœïŒç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡åã³ç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãããé·ãã以äžãå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡åã³äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®å
·äœäŸã説æããã
(B) First TA and second TA
For example, the second TA is longer than the first TA. Hereinafter, specific examples of the first TA and the second TA will be described with reference to FIG.
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡åã³ç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®äŸã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ãããšã垯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒåã³ç«¯æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®éåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã瀺ãããŠãããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã垯åã«ããããããžã®åæ¿ãã«æéïŒïŒãèŠãããããåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãã垯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããé
ããããã®çµæã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã§ããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããéããããã®ãããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒïŒã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒïŒã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãšãè¡ãã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒïŒãããé·ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒïŒã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããããã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒïŒã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã
FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining examples of the first TA and the second TA. Referring to FIG. 12, transmission / reception timings of the
ãïŒïœïŒæç€ºã®ææ³
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã³ãã³ãã®éç¥
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒã³ãã³ãã®éç¥ã«ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºãåã³äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºãè¡ãã
(C) Instruction Method (c-1) Notification of Timing Advance Command For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) receives the instruction about the first TA and the above-mentioned instruction by notification of the timing advance (TA) command. The above instruction for the second TA is performed.
ããïŒåã
ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ã
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ããšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ããšãå«ããå³ã¡ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã®éç¥ã«ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã®éç¥ã«ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ãã
-Individual TA command For example, the TA command includes a TA command for the first TA and a TA command for the second TA. That is, the base station 100 (control unit 153) issues an instruction for the first TA by notifying the TA command for the first TA, and by notifying the TA command for the second TA. And instructing the second TA.
ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®äžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãç€ºãæ å ±ãçæããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®äžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãç€ºãæ å ±ãçæããã For example, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) generates information indicating the first TA based on the TA command for the first TA, and the TA command for the second TA. Based on the above, information indicating the second TA is generated.
ãå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã調æŽããããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒã瀺ãã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããããã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã調æŽããããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒã瀺ãã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒãç®åºãããå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ã§ããïŒãçæããããããŠã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããããã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒãç®åºãããå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ã§ããïŒãçæããããããŠã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã
Specifically, for example, base station 100 (control section 153) notifies the TA command indicating T A1 for adjusting said first TA to the
ãããã«ãããäŸãã°ãïŒã€ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãå¥ã
ã«æŽæ°ããããšãå¯èœã«ãªãããã®ããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ã垯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåã³äžèšïŒµïŒ¬ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®ãããã«åºã¥ããŠããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãé©åã«èª¿æŽããããšãå¯èœã«ãªãããŸããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãšã¯é
延忣ãç°ãªãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã§ã¯ãªããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããšã«ãããããé«ã粟床ã§ã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°èª¿æŽãå¯èœã«ãªãã
This makes it possible, for example, to update two TAs separately. Therefore, the
ããïŒã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã°ã«ãŒãïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ§ïŒ
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®äžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã¯ã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ§ã®ããã®ã³ãã³ãã§ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®äžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ§ãšã¯ç°ãªã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ§ã®ããã®ã³ãã³ãã§ããã
-Timing Advance Group (TAG)
For example, the TA command for the first TA is a command for the first TAG, and the TA command for the second TA is different from the first TAG. This is a command for TAG.
ãå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ããšäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ§ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ§ããšãå«ãïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ã³ã³ãããŒã«ãšã¬ã¡ã³ããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ãããããã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ããšäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ§ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ§ããšãå«ãïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ã³ã³ãããŒã«ãšã¬ã¡ã³ããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããã
Specifically, for example, the
ãããã«ãããäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ããšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ããšãåºå¥ããããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã
Thereby, for example, the
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒãªãã»ããã®éç¥
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã³ãã³ãã®éç¥ã«ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡åã³äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ãã¡ã®äžæ¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãšäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãšã®éã®ãªãã»ããã瀺ãæ
å ±ïŒä»¥äžãããªãã»ããæ
å ±ããšåŒã¶ïŒã®éç¥ã«ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡åã³äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ãã¡ã®ä»æ¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ã£ãŠãããã
(C-2) Notification of offset The base station 100 (control unit 153) gives an instruction for one of the first TA and the second TA in response to the notification of the TA command, and the first TA Even if an instruction is given for the other of the first TA and the second TA by notification of information indicating an offset between the first TA and the second TA (hereinafter referred to as âoffset informationâ) Good.
ã端æ«è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡åã³äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ãã¡ã®äžèšäžæ¹ãç€ºãæ å ±ãçæããåœè©²æ å ±ãšäžèšãªãã»ããæ å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡åã³äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ãã¡ã®äžèšä»æ¹ãç€ºãæ å ±ãçæããŠãããã The terminal device 200 (control unit 243) generates information indicating the one of the first TA and the second TA based on the TA command, and based on the information and the offset information Information indicating the other of the first TA and the second TA may be generated.
ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡åã³äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ãã¡ã®äžæ¹ã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã§ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡åã³äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ãã¡ã®ä»æ¹ã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã§ãã£ãŠãããã One of the first TA and the second TA is the first TA, and the other of the first TA and the second TA is the second TA. Also good.
ããïŒå
·äœçãªäŸ
ãå
·äœçã«ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã調æŽããããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒã瀺ãã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããŠãããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒãç®åºããŠããããå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ã§ããïŒãçæããŠãããããŸããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒäŸãã°ãã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã®äžã§ãåã¯ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã«ãããïŒäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãšäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãšã®éã®ãªãã»ããã瀺ãæ
å ±ïŒãªãã»ããæ
å ±ïŒã§ããïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããŠãããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒãšïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ¿ïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœãšãããïŒïŒäŸãã°ãïŒïŒïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ¿ïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœïŒãç®åºããŠããããå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ã§ããïŒãçæããŠãããããªããïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœã¯ãæå®å€ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ãã£ãŠãããã
- Specific examples specifically, the base station 100 (control section 153) is a TA command indicating T A1 for adjusting said first TA may notify the
ããïŒãªãã»ããã®äœ¿çšã®ææ³
ããïŒïŒåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã®éã®äœ¿çš
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã«åãæ¿ããéã«ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãäžèšæ
å ±ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒïŒãšãäžèšãªãã»ããæ
å ±ïŒäŸãã°ãïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœïŒãšãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãäžèšæ
å ±ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒïŒãåæå€ãšããŠçæããŠãããããã®åŸã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãäžèšæ
å ±ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒïŒãçæïŒæŽæ°ïŒããŠãããã
âMethod of using offsetââUse when switching operation mode The
ããïŒïŒç¶ç¶çãªäœ¿çš
ããããã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¶ç¶çã«ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãäžèšæ
å ±ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒïŒãšãäžèšãªãã»ããæ
å ±ïŒäŸãã°ãïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœïŒãšãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãäžèšæ
å ±ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒïŒãçæããŠãããã
--- Continuous use Alternatively, the
ããïŒéç¥ã®äŸ
ããïŒïŒéç¥ã®ææ³
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã®äžã§ãäžèšãªãã»ããæ
å ±ã®éç¥ãè¡ã£ãŠãããããããã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã«ãããäžèšãªãã»ããæ
å ±ã®éç¥ãè¡ã£ãŠãããã
âExample of NotificationââMethod of Notification The base station 100 (control unit 153) may notify the offset information in the system information. Alternatively, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may notify the offset information by signaling.
ããïŒïŒéç¥ã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®åäœã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«éãããäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšãªãã»ããæ
å ±ã®éç¥ãè¡ã£ãŠããããå³ã¡ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®åäœã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«éãããäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºãè¡ã£ãŠãããã
-Timing of notification The base station 100 (the control unit 153) is not limited to the case where the operation mode is the second operation mode. Notification may be performed. That is, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) is not limited to the case where the operation mode is the second operation mode, and the base station 100 (the control unit 153) performs the operation for the second TA when the operation mode is the first mode. The above instructions may be given.
ããïŒãã®ä»
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒãäžèšãªãã»ããæ
å ±ïŒäŸãã°ãïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœïŒã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãã代ããã«ãäžèšãªãã»ããæ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠäºãèšæ¶ãããŠããŠãããã
-Others Instead of the
ãïŒïœïŒç«¯æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããã¿ã€ãã³ã°èª¿æŽææ³ã®éžæ
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãããŒã¿ã®ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éä¿¡ããããã®å Žåã«ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã«ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãäžèšæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã
(D) Selection of Timing Adjustment Method in Terminal Apparatus 200 (d-1) UL Data For example, the
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã ã§ãããŒã¿ã®ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éä¿¡ããããã®å Žåã«ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãäžèšæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã
For example, the
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«
ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã«ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãäžèšæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã
(D-2) ACK / NACK
For example, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243), for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the DL band, the DL reception timing for the DL band and the first TA indicating the first TA. The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted based on the information.
ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãäžèšæ å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã For example, the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) transmits the ACK / NACK for the DL data transmitted in the UL band, and the DL reception timing for the UL band and the second TA The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted based on the information.
ãïŒïŒïŒãã®ä»
ãïŒïœïŒïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã«åŸã£ãŠäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãã
(3) Others (a) UL / DL configuration for UL band For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) determines that the UL / DL is used when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode. Wireless communication in the UL band is performed according to the configuration.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®äŸ
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã§ãããããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã¯ãå³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒïœïŒã®ããããã§ããã
(A-1) UL / DL Configuration Example For example, the UL / DL configuration is a UL / DL configuration of TDD. More specifically, for example, the UL / DL configuration is one of the
ããªããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã§ã¯ãªããå¥ã®ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒäŸãã°ãã«åºæã®ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒã§ãã£ãŠãããã Note that the UL / DL configuration described above may be a different configuration (for example, a configuration unique to FDD) instead of the TDD UL / DL configuration.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®éžæ
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã«åãæ¿ããããå Žåã«ãïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãéžæããåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«é©çšããã
(A-2) Selection of UL / DL configuration For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) determines the UL / DL configuration when the operation mode is switched from the first mode to the second mode. And the UL / DL configuration is applied to the UL band.
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã»ã«ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããã®ãã©ãã£ãã¯ãšïŒµïŒ¬ã®ãã©ãã£ãã¯ãšã«åºã¥ããŠããµããã¬ãŒã ãšïŒµïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšã®é©åãªæ¯çãæããïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãéžæããã
For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) selects a UL / DL configuration having an appropriate ratio of DL subframes and UL subframes based on DL traffic and UL traffic in the
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®å€æŽ
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ããè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®äžã§å€æŽããŠããããäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåŸè¿°ãã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšåæ§ã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã倿ŽããŠãããã
(A-3) UL / DL configuration change When the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (control unit 153) changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band to a plurality of UL / DL configurations. You may change in UL / DL configuration candidates. For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may change the UL / DL configuration for the UL band in the same manner as in a fifth embodiment to be described later.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®éç¥
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã瀺ãæ
å ±ïŒä»¥äžããã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³æ
å ±ããšåŒã¶ïŒã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããã
(A-4) UL / DL configuration notification For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits information indicating the UL / DL configuration for the UL band (hereinafter referred to as âconfiguration informationâ) to the terminal. Notify
ãäžäŸãšããŠãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã®äžã§ãäžèšã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããäžèšã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³æ
å ±ã¯ãæ°ããªæ
å ±ãšããŠã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã®äžã«å«ãŸããŠãããããããã¯ãäžèšã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³æ
å ±ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ãããã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã®äžã«ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšããŠå«ãŸããŠãããã
As an example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the
ãå¥ã®äŸãšããŠãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžã®åå¥ã®ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã«ãããäžèšã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããã
As another example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the
ãïŒïœïŒã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é å
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒSystemãInformationãBlockïŒïŒã®äžã§ãïŒPhysicalãRandomãAccessãChannelïŒã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã€ã³ããã¯ã¹åã³ïŒ°ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒšåšæ³¢æ°ãªãã»ãããå ±ç¥ãããããã«ãããäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹ããªã¢ã³ãã«ã®éä¿¡ãèš±å¯ãããç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ïŒã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é åïŒãç¥ãããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã
(B) Random access (b-1) Random access time frequency domain For example, the
ãã§ã¯ãïŒã€ã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ã€ããïŒã€ã®ã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é åã®ã¿ãé 眮ããããç¡ç·ãã¬ãŒã ã®äžã®ãããã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é åãé 眮ããããã¯ãã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã€ã³ããã¯ã¹ããç¥ãããšãã§ãããã©ã®ãªãœãŒã¹ãããã¯ã«ã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é åãé 眮ããããã¯ãïŒ°ïŒ²ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒšåšæ³¢æ°ãªãã»ããããç¥ãããšãã§ããã In FDD, only one random access time frequency region is arranged per subframe. It can be known from the PRACH configuration index in which subframe in the radio frame the random access time frequency region is arranged. It can be known from the PRACH frequency offset to which resource block the random access time frequency region is arranged.
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããµããã¬ãŒã ã«ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é åãé
眮ããã
For example, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, the
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æç¶
ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ã€ãã«ç¶æ
ããæ¥ç¶ç¶æ
ãžã®é·ç§»ã®ããã«ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é åã«ãããŠã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹ããªã¢ã³ãã«ãéä¿¡ããã
(B-2) Random access procedure For example, the
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹å¿çã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããããã®éã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããããããã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ããšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ããšãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããŠãããã
For example, the
ãïŒïœïŒåæä¿¡å·ã®éä¿¡
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠåæä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããã
(C) Transmission of synchronization signal For example, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, the
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã®å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããäžèšåæä¿¡å·ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåæä¿¡å·ã®çæãåã³ïŒåã¯ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ãžã®äžèšåæä¿¡å·ã®ãããã³ã°ãªã©ãè¡ãã
For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the
ãããã«ãããäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããæ£ç¢ºã«åæããšãããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã
Thereby, for example, the
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒåæä¿¡å·
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšåæä¿¡å·ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããåæä¿¡å·ãšåæ§ã«ãã»ã«ïŒ©ïŒ€ã«å¯Ÿå¿ããä¿¡å·ã§ãããããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãäžèšåæä¿¡å·ã¯ãïŒPrimaryãSynchronizationãSignalïŒåã³ïŒ³ïŒ³ïŒ³ïŒSecondaryãSynchronizationãSignalïŒã§ããã
(C-1) Synchronization signal For example, the synchronization signal is a signal corresponding to the cell ID, similarly to the synchronization signal transmitted in the DL band. More specifically, for example, the synchronization signals are PSS (Primary Synchronization Signal) and SSS (Secondary Synchronization Signal).
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒæå®ã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ã®éä¿¡
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããäžã€ãç¡ç·ãã¬ãŒã ã®ãã¡ã®å°ãªããšãæå®ã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ãããŠäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšãããã¢ãŒãã§ããããããŠãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã®å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·ãã¬ãŒã ã®ãã¡ã®äžèšæå®ã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ãããŠãäžèšåæä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããã
(C-2) Transmission in a predetermined subframe For example, in the second mode, the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division, and at least in a predetermined subframe of radio frames. In this mode, the UL band is used for DL. Then, the
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã®å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãç¡ç·ãã¬ãŒã ã®ãã¡ã®äžèšæå®ã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ãããŠåæä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ãããããã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããåæä¿¡å·ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãã
For example, the
ãäžäŸãšããŠãéåžžã®ïŒŽïŒ€ïŒ€ã®ã±ãŒã¹ãšåæ§ã«ãäžèšæå®ã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ïŒãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒ°ïŒ³ïŒ³çšã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒãåã³ãµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ïŒãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒ³ïŒ³ïŒ³çšã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã§ãã£ãŠããããå¥ã®äŸãšããŠãéåžžã®ïŒŠïŒ€ïŒ€ã®ã±ãŒã¹ãšåæ§ã«ãäžèšæå®ã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ïŒãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒ°ïŒ³ïŒ³åã³ïŒ³ïŒ³ïŒ³çšã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã§ãã£ãŠãããã
As an example, as in the case of normal TDD, the predetermined subframes are subframes having
ãããã«ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠåæä¿¡å·ã確å®ã«éä¿¡ããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯äžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãã確å®ã«åæããšãããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã
Thereby, for example, the synchronization signal is reliably transmitted in the UL band, and the
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒç«¯æ«è£
眮ã«ããåäœ
ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåæä¿¡å·ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããåæããšãã
(C-3) Operation by Terminal Device For example, the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) performs synchronization in the UL band based on the synchronization signal.
ãïŒïœïŒã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ã®å²åœãŠïŒå³ã¡ãã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°ïŒãè¡ãã
(D) Scheduling For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) performs radio resource allocation (that is, scheduling).
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«
ããïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ãªãœãŒã¹ã®å²åœãŠ
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«ïŒå³ã¡ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããµããŒãããªã端æ«è£
眮ïŒã«ã¯ããªãœãŒã¹ãšããŠãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ãå²ãåœãŠãã
(D-1) Legacy terminal-DL resource allocation For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits the DL band as a DL resource to a legacy terminal (ie, a terminal device that does not support the second mode). Allocate radio resources.
ããšããããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒµïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã®ïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åã«ãããµããã¬ãŒã å ã®ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ããã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«ã«å²ãåœãŠããããã«ãããäŸãã°ãåœè©²ã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«ã¯ãäžèšç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ããããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã In particular, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, for example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) determines that the intra-frame is within 4 frames before the UL subframe of the UL band. The DL band radio resources are allocated to legacy terminals. Thereby, for example, the legacy terminal can transmit ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the radio resource in the UL band.
ããïŒã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ã®éç¥
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ïŒå³ã¡ãç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ã®å²åœãŠã瀺ãæ
å ±ïŒãã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«ã«éç¥ãããããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ°ïŒ€ïŒ£ïŒ£ïŒšïŒPhysicalãDownlinkãControlãChannelïŒã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ°ïŒ€ïŒ³ïŒ£ïŒšïŒPhysicalãDownlinkãSharedãChannelïŒåã³äžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ°ïŒµïŒ³ïŒ£ïŒšïŒPhysicalãUplinkãSharedãChannelïŒã«ã€ããŠã®ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ãã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«ã«éç¥ããã
-Notification of scheduling information For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the legacy terminal of scheduling information (that is, information indicating radio resource allocation) in the DL band. More specifically, for example, in the PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel) of the DL band, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) performs the PDSCH (Physical Downlink Shared Channel) of the DL band and the PUSCH (Physical) of the UL band. The legacy terminal is notified of scheduling information on the uplink shared channel.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒç«¯æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒ
ããïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ãªãœãŒã¹ã®å²åœãŠ
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå³ã¡ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããµããŒããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒã«ã¯ããªãœãŒã¹ãšããŠãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ãåã¯äžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã å
ã®ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ïŒãå²ãåœãŠãã
(D-2)
-Allocation of DL resource For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits, to the terminal device 200 (that is, a terminal device that supports the second mode), a DL resource as the DL resource, UL band radio resources (radio resources in the DL subframe) are allocated.
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ä¿¡å·ã«åºã¥ã枬å®ãè¡ããæž¬å®çµæãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã«å ±åããŠãããããããŠãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšæž¬å®çµæãè¯å¥œã§ããã°ïŒäŸãã°ãåä¿¡é»åãååã«å€§ãããã°ïŒãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã å
ã®ç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ïŒã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«å²ãåœãŠãŠãããã
The
ããïŒã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ã®éç¥
ããïŒïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯å
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ°ïŒ€ïŒ£ïŒ£ïŒšã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ°ïŒ€ïŒ³ïŒ£ïŒšã«ã€ããŠã®ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããã
âNotification of Scheduling Informationâ-DL Band For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the
ããïŒïŒïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ãªãœãŒã¹ïŒ
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬ãªãœãŒã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ°ïŒ€ïŒ£ïŒ£ïŒšã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ°ïŒ€ïŒ³ïŒ£ïŒšã«ã€ããŠã®ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããå³ã¡ãã¯ãã¹ãã£ãªã¢ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°ãè¡ãããã
-UL band (DL resource)
For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the
ããããã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬ãªãœãŒã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããŠããããããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ°ïŒ€ïŒ£ïŒ£ïŒšã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ°ïŒ€ïŒ³ïŒ£ïŒšã«ã€ããŠã®ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããŠãããã
Alternatively, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may notify the
ããïŒïŒïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åïŒïŒµïŒ¬ãªãœãŒã¹ïŒ
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒµïŒ¬ãªãœãŒã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ°ïŒ€ïŒ£ïŒ£ïŒšã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ°ïŒµïŒ³ïŒ£ïŒšã«ã€ããŠã®ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããã
--UL bandwidth (UL resource)
For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the
ããããã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒµïŒ¬ãªãœãŒã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããŠããããããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ°ïŒ€ïŒ£ïŒ£ïŒšã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ïŒ°ïŒµïŒ³ïŒ£ïŒšã«ã€ããŠã®ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããŠãããã
Alternatively, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may notify the
ãïŒïœ
ïŒã±ã€ãããªãã£æ
å ±ã®éç¥
ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã¬ãã·ãã«ãã¥ãã¬ã¯ã¹ïŒFlexibleãDuplexïŒã®å¯åŠã瀺ãã±ã€ãããªãã£æ
å ±ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããäŸãã°ãåœè©²ã±ã€ãããªãã£æ
å ±ã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒããµããŒããã垯åçµåãïŒbandãcombinationïŒããšã«ããã¬ãã·ãã«ãã¥ãã¬ã¯ã¹ã®å¯åŠã瀺ããããã«ãããäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããµããŒãããããšãç¥ãããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã
(E) Notification of capability information For example, the
ããªããäžèšã±ã€ãããªãã£æ å ±ã¯ãïŒç«¯æ«è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒããµããŒããã垯åçµåãããšã«ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ãã£ãªã¢ã¢ã°ãªã²ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®å¯åŠåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ãã£ãªã¢ã¢ã°ãªã²ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®å¯åŠãããã«ç€ºããŠãããã The capability information may further indicate whether or not DL carrier aggregation and UL carrier aggregation are possible (for each band combination supported by the terminal device 200).
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒåŠçã®æµãïŒ
ãæ¬¡ã«ãå³ïŒïŒåã³å³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãåŠçã®äŸã説æããã
<4.3. Flow of processing>
Next, an example of processing according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14.
ãïŒïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã®åŠç
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã®åŠçã®æŠç¥çãªæµãã®äžäŸã瀺ãã·ãŒã±ã³ã¹å³ã§ããã
(1) Processing in First Mode FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram showing an example of a schematic flow of processing in the first mode according to the first embodiment.
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã¯ãã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããã§ããã
The
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒããããŠã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ãè¡ãïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããã
The
ãïŒïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã®åŠç
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã®åŠçã®æŠç¥çãªæµãã®äžäŸã瀺ãã·ãŒã±ã³ã¹å³ã§ããã
(2) Processing in Second Mode FIG. 14 is a sequence diagram showing an example of a schematic flow of processing in the second mode according to the first embodiment.
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã¯ã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®äžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ã§ããããšããããäžèšã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããžã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšãããã¢ãŒãã§ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããã¢ãŒãã§ããã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããžåãæ¿ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããã§ãããããã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããã§ããã
The
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒããããŠã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ãè¡ãïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããã
The
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒããããŠã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ãè¡ãïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããã
The
ã以äžã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã説æããã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã«ããã°ãäŸãã°ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«åœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã The first embodiment has been described above. According to the first embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
ãããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåã³äžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®ãããã«åºã¥ããŠããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãé©åã«èª¿æŽããããšãã§ããããã®ãããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããå Žåã§ããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®åæãå®çŸãããããã®çµæãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ããåŸãã
More specifically, for example, the
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ïŒïŒ
ãç¶ããŠãå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠãæ¬é瀺ã®ç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã説æããã
<< 5. Second Embodiment >>
Subsequently, a first embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIG.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡ç課é¡ïŒ
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãæè¡ç課é¡ã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãæè¡ç課é¡ãšåãã§ããããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
<5.1. Technical issues>
The technical problem according to the second embodiment is the same as the technical problem according to the first embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡çç¹åŸŽïŒ
ãæ¬¡ã«ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãæè¡çç¹åŸŽã説æããã
<5.2. Technical features>
Next, technical features according to the second embodiment will be described.
ãïŒïŒïŒåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ã
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããã
(1) Switching of operation mode The base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
ãåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã There is no difference between the first embodiment and the second embodiment regarding the switching of the operation mode. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïŒïŒã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€º
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãåã³ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ãã
(2) Instruction for timing advance In the second embodiment, the base station 100 (control unit 153) instructs the first TA to be based on the DL reception timing for the DL band, and the UL band. For the second TA with reference to the DL reception timing for.
ããšããã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããµããŒãããªãã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«ãžã®æç€ºã§ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããµããŒããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžã®æç€ºã§ããã
Particularly, in the second embodiment, the instruction for the first TA is an instruction to a legacy terminal that does not support the second mode, and the instruction for the second TA is the second instruction. This is an instruction to the
ãäžæ¹ãäžèšã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããšããã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽãããããã«ãããäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããå Žåã§ããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãé©åã«èª¿æŽããããšãã§ããã
Meanwhile, the legacy terminal adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA. In particular, in the second embodiment, when the operation mode is the second mode, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) transmits the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA. Based on the above, the UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted. Thereby, for example, the
ãïŒïœïŒç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã®æç€º
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºãåã³äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºãè¡ãã
(A) Instruction in the second mode For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153), and the second instruction in the first TA and the second mode The above instructions for TAs are made.
ãïŒïœïŒç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡åã³ç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãããé·ãã
(B) First TA and second TA
For example, the second TA is longer than the first TA.
ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡åã³äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®äŸã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã In the description of the example of the first TA and the second TA, there is no difference between the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœïŒæç€ºã®ææ³
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒã³ãã³ãã®éç¥ã«ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºãåã³äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºãè¡ãã
(C) Instruction Method For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) performs the instruction for the first TA and the instruction for the second TA by notification of a timing advance (TA) command. .
ããïŒåã
ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ã
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ããšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ããšãå«ããå³ã¡ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã®éç¥ã«ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã®éç¥ã«ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ãã
-Individual TA command For example, the TA command includes a TA command for the first TA and a TA command for the second TA. That is, the base station 100 (control unit 153) issues an instruction for the first TA by notifying the TA command for the first TA, and by notifying the TA command for the second TA. And instructing the second TA.
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«ã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®äžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãç€ºãæ å ±ãçæããã端æ«è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®äžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãç€ºãæ å ±ãçæããã For example, the legacy terminal generates information indicating the first TA based on the TA command for the first TA. The terminal device 200 (control unit 243) generates information indicating the second TA based on the TA command for the second TA.
ãïŒïŒïŒãã®ä»
ãïŒïœïŒïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³
ãïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(3) Others (a) UL / DL configuration for UL band There is no difference between the first embodiment and the second embodiment in the description of the UL / DL configuration. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœïŒã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é å
ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é åã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(B) Random access (b-1) Random access time frequency region The description of the random access time frequency region is not different between the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æç¶
ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ã€ãã«ç¶æ
ããæ¥ç¶ç¶æ
ãžã®é·ç§»ã®ããã«ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é åã«ãããŠã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹ããªã¢ã³ãã«ãéä¿¡ããã
(B-2) Random access procedure For example, the
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹å¿çã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããããã®éã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããããšããããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããã
For example, the
ããªããäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããïŒã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããããã§ã®ã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ããšã¯ãåã«ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãããæå³ããç¹å®ã®ç«¯æ«ïŒäŸãã°ãäžèšã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«ïŒã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãæå³ããªããå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ããã®ã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ããšãäžèšã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«ã®ããã®ã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ããšã¯ãç°ãªãã§ããã
When the operation mode is the first mode, the
ãïŒïœïŒåæä¿¡å·ã®éä¿¡
ãåæä¿¡å·ã®éä¿¡ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(C) Transmission of synchronization signal There is no difference between the first embodiment and the second embodiment regarding the transmission of the synchronization signal. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœïŒã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°
ãã¹ã±ãŒãªã³ã°ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(D) Scheduling Scaling is not different between the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœ
ïŒã±ã€ãããªãã£æ
å ±ã®éç¥
ãã±ã€ãããªãã£æ
å ±ã®éç¥ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(E) Notification of capability information The description of the notification of capability information is not different between the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒåŠçã®æµãïŒ
ãæ¬¡ã«ãå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãåŠçã®äŸã説æããã
<5.3. Flow of processing>
Next, an example of processing according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
ãïŒïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã®åŠç
ã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã®åŠçã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(1) Processing in the first mode The description of the processing in the first mode is not different between the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã®åŠç
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ã®åŠçã®æŠç¥çãªæµãã®äžäŸã瀺ãã·ãŒã±ã³ã¹å³ã§ããã
(2) Processing in Second Mode FIG. 15 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of processing in the second mode according to the second embodiment.
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã¯ã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®äžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ã§ããããšããããäžèšã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããžã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšãããã¢ãŒãã§ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããã¢ãŒãã§ããã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããžåãæ¿ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ããã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«ã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããã§ãããããã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããã§ããã
The
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒããããŠã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ãè¡ãïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããã
The
ãäžèšã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒããããŠãäžèšã¬ã¬ã·ãŒç«¯æ«ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ãè¡ãïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããã
The legacy terminal adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA (S353). Then, the legacy terminal performs UL transmission in the UL band (S355). That is, the
ã以äžã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã説æããã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã«ããã°ãäŸãã°ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«åœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã The second embodiment has been described above. According to the second embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
ãããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«åºã¥ãããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããã®ãããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããå Žåã§ããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®åæãå®çŸãããããã®çµæãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ããåŸãããŸãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®æ°ãå¢ããªãã®ã§ãã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã®ãªãŒããŒãããã®å¢å ãæãããåŸãã
More specifically, for example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ïŒïŒ
ãç¶ããŠãå³ïŒïŒåã³å³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠãæ¬é瀺ã®ç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã説æããã
<< 6. Third Embodiment >>
Subsequently, a third embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡ç課é¡ïŒ
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãæè¡ç課é¡ã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãæè¡ç課é¡ãšåãã§ããããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
<6.1. Technical issues>
The technical problem according to the third embodiment is the same as the technical problem according to the first embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡çç¹åŸŽïŒ
ãæ¬¡ã«ãå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãæè¡çç¹åŸŽã説æããã
<5.2. Technical features>
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the technical feature which concerns on 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated.
ãïŒïŒïŒåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ã
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããã
(1) Switching of operation mode The base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
ãïŒïœïŒåæ¿ãã®ããªã¬
ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã®ããªã¬ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(A) Trigger for switching The description of the trigger for switching the operation mode is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœïŒåæ¿ãã®éç¥
ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã®éç¥ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(B) Notification of switching The description of the notification of switching of the operation mode is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœïŒåæ¿ãã«å¿ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®åäœ
ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã«å¿ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®åäœã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(C) Operation of
ãïŒïŒïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåæãããã以äžããã®ç¹ã«ã€ããŠãå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠå
·äœäŸã説æããã
(2) Timing of downlink transmission In the third embodiment, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (control unit 153) determines the FDD DL band corresponding to the UL band. The DL transmission timing is synchronized with the DL transmission timing for the UL band. Hereinafter, a specific example of this point will be described with reference to FIG.
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ã垯ååã³ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®äŸã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ãããšã垯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒåã³ç«¯æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®éåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã瀺ãããŠãããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ã垯åã«ããããããžã®åæ¿ãã«æéïŒïŒãèŠããããããã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãæéïŒïŒãèæ
®ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãã垯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšåæãããããã®çµæã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã§ã¯ãäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåæããããã®ããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ïŒäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåã¯äžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ïŒãšïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒïŒã«åºã¥ããŠã垯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã
FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of DL transmission timing for the DL band and the UL band. Referring to FIG. 16, transmission / reception timings of the
ãããã«ãããäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããå Žåã§ããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãé©åã«èª¿æŽããããšãã§ããã
Thereby, for example, the
ããªããæ¬æçްæžã«ãããŠããã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåæãããããšã¯ããã¿ã€ãã³ã°éã®å·®ãå šããªããªãããã«ãåœè©²ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåæããããããšãæå³ããªããŠããããäŸãã°ããã¿ã€ãã³ã°éã®å·®ãæå®ç¯å²å ã«åãŸãããã«ãåœè©²ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåæããããããšãæå³ããŠãããã In the present specification, âsynchronizing timingâ may not mean âsynchronizing the timing so that there is no difference between timingsâ. It may mean that the timing is synchronized so that it falls within a predetermined range.
ãïŒïŒïŒã¢ãããªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°
ãïŒïœïŒç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒã
ãäŸãã°ãå°ãªããšãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããæå®æéã ãæ©ããäŸãã°ãåœè©²æå®æéã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ããããããžã®åæ¿ãã«èŠããæéã§ããã
(3) Timing of uplink reception (a) Second mode For example, when at least the operation mode is the second mode, the UL reception timing for the UL band is the DL transmission timing for the DL band. Earlier than the specified time. For example, the predetermined time is a time required for switching from UL to DL in the UL band.
ãå³ïŒïŒãåã³åç
§ãããšãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠã垯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ã垯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ããããæéïŒïŒïŒå³ã¡ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ããããããžã®åæ¿ãã«èŠããæéïŒã ãæ©ãã
Referring to FIG. 16 again, in the
ãããã«ãããäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããå Žåã§ããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåæãããããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã
Thereby, for example, the
ãïŒïœïŒç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒã
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®äŸ
ã第ïŒã®äŸãšããŠãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšåæãããå³ã¡ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã«åãæ¿ããéã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãäžèšæå®æéã ãæ©ãããã
(B) First mode (b-1) First example As a first example, when the operation mode is the first mode, in the
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®äŸ
ã第ïŒã®äŸãšããŠãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããäžèšæå®æéã ãæ©ããŠããããå³ã¡ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãããã£ããšããŠããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã倿ŽããªããŠãããã
(B-2) Second Example As a second example, even when the operation mode is the first mode, in the
ãïŒïŒïŒã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€º
ãïŒïœïŒç¬¬ïŒã®äŸ
ãäžè¿°ããããã«ã第ïŒã®äŸãšããŠãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšåæããããŸããäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããäžèšæå®æéã ãæ©ãã
(4) Instruction about timing advance (a) First example As described above, as the first example, when the operation mode is the first mode, the UL reception timing for the UL band is: It synchronizes with the DL transmission timing for the DL band. In addition, when the operation mode is the second mode, the UL reception timing for the UL band is earlier than the DL transmission timing for the DL band by the predetermined time.
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããžã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã«å¿ããŠäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãäžèšæå®æéã ãé·ããªãããã«ãåœè©²ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ããåœè©²æç€ºã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžã®æç€ºã§ãããããã«ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšåæ¿ãã«å¿ããŠäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãæå®æéã ãæ©ãããããšãå¯èœã«ãªãããã®çµæãäŸãã°ããµããã¬ãŒã ãšïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšã®éã§ã®è¡çªãåé¿ãããã
For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may increase the TA for UL transmission in the UL band by the predetermined time in accordance with the switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode. And instructing the TA. This instruction is an instruction to the
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã®éç¥
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåæ¿ãã®ïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ãããã³ãã³ãã®éç¥ã«ãããäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºãè¡ããäŸãã°ãåœè©²ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ã®äžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ãäžèšæå®æéã ãé·ãããå€ïŒïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒã瀺ããããã«ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšåæ¿ãã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã§ãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ãäžèšæå®æéã ãé·ãããããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã
(A-1) Notification of TA Command For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) gives the instruction for the TA by the notification of the TA command in the subframe six subframes before the switching. For example, the TA command indicates a value (T A ) that makes the TA for UL transmission in the UL band longer by the predetermined time. Thereby, for example, the TA can be lengthened by the predetermined time at the switching timing.
ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãç€ºãæ å ±ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒãçæããã For example, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) generates information (for example, N TA ) indicating the UL transmission TA in the UL band based on the TA command.
ããªããäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããžã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã®åã«ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãäžèšæå®æéã ãçããªãããã«ãåœè©²ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ããäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåæ¿ãã®ïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ãããã³ãã³ãã®éç¥ã«ãããäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºãè¡ãã For example, before switching the operation mode from the second mode to the first mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) determines that the TA for UL transmission in the UL band is the predetermined time. An instruction for the TA is given to shorten the time. For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) gives the instruction for the TA by notifying the TA command in a subframe six subframes before the switching.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒãªãã»ããã®éç¥
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšæå®æéã«å¯Ÿå¿ãããªãã»ããã瀺ãæ
å ±ïŒä»¥äžãããªãã»ããæ
å ±ããšåŒã¶ïŒã®éç¥ã«ãããäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºãè¡ã£ãŠãããã
(A-2) Notification of offset The base station 100 (control unit 153) gives the instruction for the TA by notification of information indicating the offset corresponding to the predetermined time (hereinafter referred to as âoffset informationâ). May be.
ã端æ«è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšãªãã»ããæ å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãç€ºãæ å ±ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒãçæããŠãããã The terminal device 200 (control unit 243) may generate information indicating the TA of UL transmission in the UL band (for example, N TA ) based on the offset information.
ããïŒå
·äœçãªäŸ
ãå
·äœçã«ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒäŸãã°ãã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã®äžã§ãåã¯ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã«ãããïŒãªãã»ããæ
å ±ïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ¿ïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããŠãããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããšïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ïŒ¿ïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœãšãããæ°ããªïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãç®åºããŠããããå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ã§ããïŒ®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãæ°ãã«çæããŠãããããªããïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœã¯ãæå®å€ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒïŒïŒïŒã§ãã£ãŠãããã
Specific Example Specifically, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may notify the
ããïŒãªãã»ããã®äœ¿çšã®ææ³ïŒåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã®éã®äœ¿çšïŒ
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã«åãæ¿ããéã«ãäžèšãªãã»ããæ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãäžèšæ
å ±ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒãçæããŠãããããã®åŸã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã³ãã³ãã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãäžèšæ
å ±ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒãçæïŒæŽæ°ïŒããŠãããã
-Method of using offset (use when switching operation mode)
The
ããïŒéç¥ã®äŸ
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã®äžã§ãäžèšãªãã»ããæ
å ±ã®éç¥ãè¡ã£ãŠãããããããã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåå¥ã®ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã«ãããäžèšãªãã»ããæ
å ±ã®éç¥ãè¡ã£ãŠããããåœè©²åå¥ã®ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã¯ãã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã§ãã£ãŠãããã
-Notification example The base station 100 (control unit 153) may notify the offset information in the system information. Alternatively, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may notify the offset information by individual signaling. The individual signaling may be RRC signaling.
ããïŒãã®ä»
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒãäžèšãªãã»ããæ
å ±ïŒäŸãã°ãïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœïŒã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãã代ããã«ãäžèšãªãã»ããæ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠäºãèšæ¶ãããŠããŠãããã
-Others Instead of the
ãïŒïœïŒç¬¬ïŒã®äŸ
ãäžè¿°ããããã«ã第ïŒã®äŸãšããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããã«ããããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããäžèšæå®æéã ãæ©ããŠãããã
(B) Second Example As described above, as a second example, the UL reception timing for the UL band depends on whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode. Instead, it may be earlier than the DL transmission timing for the DL band by the predetermined time.
ããã®å Žåã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®äžèšåæ¿ãã®æç¡ã«ããããéåžžéããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ã£ãŠããããäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãéåžžéããã³ãã³ãã®éç¥ã«ãããäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ã£ãŠãããã In this case, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may instruct the UL transmission TA in the UL band as usual, regardless of whether or not the operation mode is switched. For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may instruct the TA as usual by notifying the TA command.
ãïŒïœïŒç«¯æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®åäœ
ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽãããäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã§ãããäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã§ãã£ãŠããããåã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã§ãã£ãŠãããã
(C) Operation of
ãïŒïŒïŒãã®ä»
ãïŒïœïŒã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®éç¥
ãïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(5) Others (a) UL / DL configuration notification for uplink bandwidth The description of the UL / DL configuration is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœïŒã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é å
ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é åã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(B) Random access (b-1) Random access time frequency region The description of the random access time frequency region is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æç¶
ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ã€ãã«ç¶æ
ããæ¥ç¶ç¶æ
ãžã®é·ç§»ã®ããã«ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é åã«ãããŠã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹ããªã¢ã³ãã«ãéä¿¡ããã
(B-2) Random access procedure For example, the
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹å¿çã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããããã®éã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããã
For example, the
ãïŒïœïŒåæä¿¡å·
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãã£ãŠããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠåæä¿¡å·ã¯éä¿¡ãããªããå³ã¡ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãã£ãŠããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠåæä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããªããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšåæããŠããããã§ãããããã«ãããäŸãã°ãç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ãç¯çŽãããã
(C) Synchronization signal For example, even if the operation mode is the second mode, a synchronization signal is not transmitted in the UL band. That is, the
ããããã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠåæä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããŠãããã
Alternatively, the
ãïŒïœïŒã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°
ãã¹ã±ãŒãªã³ã°ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(D) Scheduling Scaling is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœ
ïŒã±ã€ãããªãã£æ
å ±ã®éç¥
ãã±ã€ãããªãã£æ
å ±ã®éç¥ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(E) Notification of capability information The description of the notification of capability information is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒåŠçã®æµãïŒ
ãæ¬¡ã«ãå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãåŠçã®äŸã説æãããå³ïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãåŠçã®æŠç¥çãªæµãã®äžäŸã瀺ãã·ãŒã±ã³ã¹å³ã§ããããªããåœè©²åŠçã®èª¬æã«ãããŠãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã¯ãæåã«ã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã«ãªã£ãŠãããã®ãšããã
<6.3. Flow of processing>
Next, an example of processing according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of processing according to the third embodiment. In the description of the processing, it is assumed that the operation mode for the UL band of the FDD is first the first mode.
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã
The
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒããããŠã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ãè¡ãïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã¯ã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®äžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ã§ããããšããããäžèšã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããžã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšãããã¢ãŒãã§ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããã¢ãŒãã§ããã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®äžèšåæ¿ãã®åã«ãã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåæ¿ãã®ïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããžåãæ¿ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒããŸããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåæãããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã
The
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯ååã¯äžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒããããŠã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ãè¡ãïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããã
The
ã以äžã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã説æããã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã«ããã°ãäŸãã°ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«åœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã The third embodiment has been described above. According to the third embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
ãããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåã³äžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®ãããã«åºã¥ããŠããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãé©åã«èª¿æŽããããšãã§ããããã®ãããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããå Žåã§ããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®åæãå®çŸãããããã®çµæãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ããåŸãããŸãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®æ°ãå¢ããªãã®ã§ãã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã®ãªãŒããŒãããã®å¢å ãæãããåŸãã
More specifically, for example, the
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ïŒïŒ
ãç¶ããŠãå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠãæ¬é瀺ã®ç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã説æããã
<< 7. Fourth Embodiment >>
Subsequently, a fourth embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIG.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡ç課é¡ïŒ
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãæè¡ç課é¡ã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãæè¡ç課é¡ãšåãã§ããããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
<7.1. Technical issues>
The technical problem according to the fourth embodiment is the same as the technical problem according to the first embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡çç¹åŸŽïŒ
ãæ¬¡ã«ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãæè¡çç¹åŸŽã説æããã
<7.2. Technical features>
Next, technical features according to the fourth embodiment will be described.
ãïŒïŒïŒåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ã
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããã
(1) Switching of operation mode The base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
ãåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã There is no difference between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment regarding the switching of the operation mode. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïŒïŒã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€º
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããåã¯äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããã«ããããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ããåœè©²æç€ºã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžã®æç€ºã§ããããªããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ããªãã
(2) Instruction about timing advance In the fourth embodiment, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) determines whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode. The TA is instructed based on the DL reception timing for the FDD DL band corresponding to the UL band. This instruction is an instruction to the
ãäžæ¹ããšããã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã§ã¯ã端æ«è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããåã¯äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããã«ããããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã On the other hand, particularly in the fourth embodiment, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) determines whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode, regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode. The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted based on the DL reception timing.
ãå ·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã®éç¥ã«ãããåœè©²ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšæç€ºãè¡ãã端æ«è£ çœ®ïŒæ å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ããååŸããããããŠã端æ«è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ãç€ºãæ å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããªãã端æ«è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãäžèšæ å ±ãçæããã Specifically, for example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) gives the above instruction for the TA by notifying the TA command for the TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band. The terminal device (information acquisition unit 241) acquires the TA command. And the terminal device 200 (control part 243) adjusts UL transmission timing about the said UL band based on the DL reception timing about the said DL band, and the information which shows said TA. The terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) generates the information indicating the TA based on the TA command.
ãå³ïŒïŒãåã³åç
§ãããšãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã«ããããïŒïŒïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããïŒã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã«ããããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãïŒïŒã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã
Referring to FIG. 11 again, for example, the
ãïŒïŒïŒãã®ä»
ãïŒïœïŒã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®éç¥
ãïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(3) Others (a) UL / DL configuration notification for uplink bandwidth The description of the UL / DL configuration is not different between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœïŒã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é å
ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é åã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(B) Random access (b-1) Random access time frequency region The description of the random access time frequency region is not different between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æç¶
ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ã€ãã«ç¶æ
ããæ¥ç¶ç¶æ
ãžã®é·ç§»ã®ããã«ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹æéåšæ³¢æ°é åã«ãããŠã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹ããªã¢ã³ãã«ãéä¿¡ããã
(B-2) Random access procedure For example, the
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹å¿çã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããããã®éã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããã
For example, the
ãïŒïœïŒåæä¿¡å·
ãåæä¿¡å·ã®éä¿¡ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(C) Synchronization signal The description of the transmission of the synchronization signal is not different between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœïŒã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°
ãã¹ã±ãŒãªã³ã°ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(D) Scheduling Scaling is not different between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœ
ïŒã±ã€ãããªãã£æ
å ±ã®éç¥
ãã±ã€ãããªãã£æ
å ±ã®éç¥ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ãšã®éã«å·®ç°ã¯ãªãããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(E) Notification of capability information The description of the notification of capability information is not different between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒåŠçã®æµãïŒ
ãæ¬¡ã«ãå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãåŠçã®äŸã説æãããå³ïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãåŠçã®æŠç¥çãªæµãã®äžäŸã瀺ãã·ãŒã±ã³ã¹å³ã§ããããªããåœè©²åŠçã®èª¬æã«ãããŠãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã¯ãæåã«ã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã«ãªã£ãŠãããã®ãšããã
<7.3. Flow of processing>
Next, an example of processing according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of a process according to the fourth embodiment. In the description of the processing, it is assumed that the operation mode for the UL band of the FDD is first the first mode.
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã
The
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒããããŠã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ãè¡ãïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã¯ã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®äžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ã§ããããšããããäžèšã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããžã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšãããã¢ãŒãã§ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããã¢ãŒãã§ããã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããžåãæ¿ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã³ãã³ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã
The
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšïŒŽïŒ¡ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒããããŠã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ãè¡ãïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãå³ã¡ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒµïŒ¬ä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ããã
The
ã以äžã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã説æããã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã«ããã°ãäŸãã°ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«åœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã The fourth embodiment has been described above. According to the fourth embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
ãããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããã«ããããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããã®ãããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããå Žåã§ããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®åæãå®çŸãããããã®çµæãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ããåŸãããŸãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ããã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã®æ°ãå¢ããªãã®ã§ãã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã®ãªãŒããŒãããã®å¢å ãæãããåŸãã
More specifically, for example, the
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ïŒïŒ
ãç¶ããŠãå³ïŒïŒïœå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠãæ¬é瀺ã®ç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã説æããã
<< 8. Fifth embodiment >>
Subsequently, a fifth embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIGS.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡ç課é¡ïŒ
ããŸããå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãæè¡ç課é¡ã説æããã
<8.1. Technical issues>
First, a technical problem according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããææ³ãæ€èšãããŠãããåœè©²ææ³ã¯ããã¬ãã·ãã«ãã¥ãã¬ã¯ã¹ãšåŒã°ãåŸãã A method of using the FDD UL band for both DL and UL in a time division manner is being studied. This approach can be referred to as flexible duplex.
ãããããã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«ã¯ãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¯å¥œã«è¡ãããªãå¯èœæ§ãããã However, when the FDD UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication may not be performed well in the UL band.
ãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãããŒã¿ããã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãåœè©²ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã®ïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åŸã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããããããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åããæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããå Žåã«ã¯ãäžèšãããµããã¬ãŒã ã®ïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åŸã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ããµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããåŸãããã®ããã端æ«è£ 眮ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããããšãã§ããªããªãåŸãããããã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ãéä¿¡ããããµããã¬ãŒã ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã®ïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ã®ã¿ã«éå®ããåŸãã以äžããã®ç¹ã«ã€ããŠãå³ïŒïŒãåç §ããŠå ·äœäŸã説æããã More specifically, for example, when DL data is transmitted in a certain subframe in the FDD DL band, ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in four subframes of the certain subframe in the FDD UL band. It is transmitted in a subframe after the frame. However, when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division, a subframe after four subframes of the certain subframe may be a DL subframe. Therefore, the terminal device may not be able to transmit the ACK / NACK for the DL data. Alternatively, the subframe in which DL data is transmitted in the DL band may be limited to a subframe that is four subframes before the UL subframe. Hereinafter, a specific example of this point will be described with reference to FIG.
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããããµããã¬ãŒã ããµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããäŸã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒïŒãåç §ãããšãã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšã瀺ãããŠããããã®äŸã§ã¯ãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã¯æåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããŠãããäŸãã°ãããŒã¿ããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ãéåžžãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããããããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã¯ãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããŠããããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ããµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããã®ã§ã端æ«è£ 眮ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããããšãã§ããªãããããã¯ãåºå°å±ã¯ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§äžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ãéä¿¡ããããšãã§ããªããåæ§ã«ãäŸãã°ãããŒã¿ããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ãéåžžãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããããããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã¯ãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããŠããããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ããµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããã®ã§ãäžèšç«¯æ«è£ 眮ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããããšãã§ããªãããããã¯ãäžèšåºå°å±ã¯ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§äžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ãéä¿¡ããããšãã§ããªãã FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example in which a subframe in which ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted is a DL subframe. Referring to FIG. 19, an FDD DL band subframe and an FDD UL band subframe are shown. In this example, the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. For example, when DL data is transmitted in a subframe having a subframe number of 0 in the DL band, an ACK / NACK for the DL data usually has a subframe number of 4 in the UL band. Sent in subframe. However, the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, and the subframe having a subframe number of 4 is a DL subframe. NACK cannot be transmitted. Alternatively, the base station cannot transmit the DL data in a subframe whose subframe number is 0. Similarly, for example, when DL data is transmitted in a subframe having a subframe number of 1 in the DL band, an ACK / NACK for the DL data usually has a subframe number in the UL band. 5 is transmitted in a subframe. However, since the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, and the subframe having a subframe number of 5 is a DL subframe, the terminal apparatus transmits an ACK for the DL data. / NACK cannot be transmitted. Alternatively, the base station cannot transmit the DL data in a subframe whose subframe number is 1.
ãããã§ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«åœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãããšãå¯èœã«ããä»çµã¿ãæäŸãããããšãæãŸãããããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãé©åã«éä¿¡ããããšãå¯èœã«ããä»çµã¿ãæäŸãããããšãæãŸããã Therefore, it is desirable to provide a mechanism that enables better wireless communication in the UL band when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner. More specifically, for example, when a UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, a mechanism that enables appropriate transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data is provided. desirable.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒæè¡çç¹åŸŽïŒ
ãæ¬¡ã«ãå³ïŒïŒïœå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãæè¡çç¹åŸŽã説æããã
<8.2. Technical features>
Next, technical features according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
ãïŒïŒïŒåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ã
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããã
(1) Switching of operation mode The base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã«ãããåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒïœç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã®ããããã«ãããåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æãšåãã§ããããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã The description of the operation mode switching in the fifth embodiment is the same as the description of the operation mode switching in any of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã«åŸã£ãŠäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãã
(2) UL / DL configuration For example, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, the base station 100 (control unit 153) performs radio transmission in the UL band according to the UL / DL configuration. Communicate.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®äŸ
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã§ãããããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã¯ãå³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒïœïŒã®ããããã§ããã
(A) Example of UL / DL Configuration For example, the UL / DL configuration is a UL / DL configuration of TDD. More specifically, for example, the UL / DL configuration is one of the
ããªããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã§ã¯ãªããå¥ã®ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒäŸãã°ãã«åºæã®ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒã§ãã£ãŠãããã Note that the UL / DL configuration described above may be a different configuration (for example, a configuration unique to FDD) instead of the TDD UL / DL configuration.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®å€æŽ
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ããè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®äžã§å€æŽãããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãåçã«ïŒdynamicallyïŒå€æŽããŠããããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãæºéçã«ïŒsemi-staticallyïŒå€æŽããŠãããã
(C) Change of UL / DL configuration For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band to a plurality of UL / DL configurations. Change in UL / DL configuration candidates. The base station 100 (control unit 153) may dynamically change the UL / DL configuration for the UL band, and semi-statically change the UL / DL configuration for the UL band. (Semi-statically)
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ãã®è€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã§ãããããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ãå³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒïœïŒã®ãã¡ã®ïŒã€ä»¥äžã§ãããäžäŸãšããŠãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ãå³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒãïŒãïŒãïŒã§ããã
(C-1) Multiple UL / DL Configuration Candidates For example, the multiple UL / DL configuration candidates are a plurality of UL / DL configurations of TDD. More specifically, for example, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are two or more of the
ããªããäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ãã®è€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã§ã¯ãªããå¥ã®è€æ°ã®ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒäŸãã°ãã«åºæã®è€æ°ã®ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒã§ãã£ãŠãããã It should be noted that the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates may be a plurality of different configurations (for example, a plurality of configurations unique to FDD) instead of a plurality of UL / DL configurations of TDD.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒå€æŽã®ææ³
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã»ã«ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããã®ãã©ãã£ãã¯ãšïŒµïŒ¬ã®ãã©ãã£ãã¯ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã倿Žãããããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãããµããã¬ãŒã ãšïŒµïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšã®ããé©åãªæ¯çãæããïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã«å€æŽããã
(C-2) Changing Method For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band based on the DL traffic and the UL traffic in the
ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®å€æŽã«ãããäŸãã°ããªãœãŒã¹ã®éãšïŒµïŒ¬ãªãœãŒã¹ã®éãšãããæè»ã«èª¿æŽããããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã -By changing the UL / DL configuration for the UL band, for example, the amount of DL resources and the amount of UL resources can be adjusted more flexibly.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®éç¥
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã瀺ãæ
å ±ïŒä»¥äžããã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³æ
å ±ããšåŒã¶ïŒã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããã
(D) UL / DL configuration notification For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits information indicating the UL / DL configuration for the UL band (hereinafter referred to as âconfiguration informationâ) to the
ãäžäŸãšããŠãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã®äžã§ãäžèšã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããäžèšã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³æ
å ±ã¯ãæ°ããªæ
å ±ãšããŠã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã®äžã«å«ãŸããŠãããããããã¯ãäžèšã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³æ
å ±ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ãããã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã®äžã«ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšããŠå«ãŸããŠãããã
As an example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the
ãå¥ã®äŸãšããŠãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžã®åå¥ã®ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã«ãããäžèšã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããäŸãã°ãåœè©²åå¥ã®ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã¯ãã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã§ããã
As another example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã®éç¥
ãïŒïœïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã
ããšããã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ïŒä»¥äžããïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ããšåŒã¶ïŒãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããã
(3) Notification of ACK / NACK subframe related information (a) Subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data In particular, in the fifth embodiment, the base station 100 (control unit 153) has the above operation mode In the second mode, the
ãäžæ¹ã端æ«è£
çœ®ïŒæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ãååŸãããããã«ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãã
Meanwhile, the terminal device (information acquisition unit 241) acquires the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information. Furthermore, when the operation mode is the second mode, the
ãããã«ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãé©åã«éä¿¡ããããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã Thereby, for example, when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, it becomes possible to appropriately transmit ACK / NACK for DL data.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿
ããïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ãå«ããå³ã¡ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ã§ããããŸãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ããã
(A-1) DL data-DL data transmitted in the DL band For example, the DL data includes DL data transmitted in the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band. That is, the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information is information regarding a subframe in which ACK / NACK is transmitted for DL data transmitted in the DL band. In addition, when the operation mode is the second mode, the
ãããã«ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãé©åã«éä¿¡ããããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã Thereby, for example, it becomes possible to appropriately transmit ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the DL band.
ããïŒïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ãããã«å«ããå³ã¡ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ã§ãããããŸãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ããã
-DL data transmitted in the UL band For example, the DL data further includes DL data transmitted in the UL band. That is, the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information is information related to a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the UL band. In addition, when the operation mode is the second mode, the
ãããã«ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãé©åã«éä¿¡ããããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã Thereby, for example, it becomes possible to appropriately transmit ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the UL band.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒãµããã¬ãŒã
ãäŸãã°ãïŒäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããïŒäžèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®éã§å
±éã®ïŒµïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ãããããã«ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®äžã§å€æŽããããšããŠããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã確å®ã«éä¿¡ããããšãå¯èœã«ãªããäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã倿ŽåŸã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãç¥ãåã«ãåœè©²å€æŽåŸã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãé©çšããããšããŠãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãã§ããã
(A-2) Subframe For example, the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the DL data) is a UL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. Thereby, for example, even if the UL / DL configuration for the UL band is changed among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates, it is possible to reliably transmit ACK / NACK for DL data. Become. For example, even if the changed UL / DL configuration is applied before the
ãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãïŒäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããïŒäžèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®ãã¡ã®ç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®ããã«å®çŸ©ããããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡çšã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããããã®ãããªå Žåã«ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãšåŒã°ãåŸãã以äžãå³ïŒïŒãåç §ããŠããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®ããã«å®çŸ©ããããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡çšã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã®äŸã説æããã More specifically, for example, the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the DL data) is for the first UL / DL configuration candidate among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. It is a defined subframe for transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data. In such a case, the first UL / DL configuration candidate may be referred to as a DL reference UL / DL configuration. Hereinafter, an example of subframes (subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data) defined for DL reference UL / DL configuration will be described with reference to FIG.
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®ããã«å®çŸ©ããããµããã¬ãŒã ã®äžäŸã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ãããšããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®ããã«å®çŸ©ããããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡çšã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã瀺ãããŠããããã®ããŒãã«ã¯ãïŒïŒ§ïŒ°ïŒ°ããïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«å«ãŸããïœïœïœïœ
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒ¡ïŒïŒãšåããã®ã§ãããäŸãã°ãã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒã®ããã«ã¯ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡çšã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšããŠå®çŸ©ãããŠãããããå
·äœçã«ã¯ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§ã¯ãåœè©²ãµããã¬ãŒã ãããïŒïœïŒïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒå³ã¡ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒïœïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã§éä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããããŸãããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§ã¯ãåœè©²ãµããã¬ãŒã ãããïŒïœïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒå³ã¡ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒïœïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã§éä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããã
FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of subframes defined for DL reference UL / DL configuration. Referring to FIG. 20, a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data, defined for DL reference UL / DL configuration, is shown. This table is the same as Table 10.1.3A-1 included in 3GPP TS 36.213. For example, for
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®ãã¡ã®ããµããã¬ãŒã ã®æ°ãæå°ã§ããïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã§ãããäžäŸãšããŠãäžè¿°ããããã«ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ãå³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒãïŒãïŒãïŒã§ããããã®å Žåã«ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ãå³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒã§ãããããã«ããã®å Žåã«ãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããããã«ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããã以äžãå³ïŒïŒåã³å³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®äŸã説æããã
For example, the first UL / DL configuration candidate is a UL / DL configuration candidate having the smallest number of UL subframes among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. As an example, as described above, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are the
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ã垯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®äžäŸã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ãããšãã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšã瀺ãããŠããããã®äŸã§ã¯ãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã¯ç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã¯æåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããŠããããŸããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã¯ãã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒã§ãããäŸãã°ãããŒã¿ããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒïœïŒã®ããããã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒµïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã§éä¿¡ãããããŸããäŸãã°ãããŒã¿ããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒïœïŒã®ããããã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒµïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã§éä¿¡ãããã
FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the DL band. Referring to FIG. 21, a subframe of the FDD DL band and a subframe of the FDD UL band are shown. In this example, the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The UL / DL configuration for the UL band is
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ã垯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®äžäŸã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ãããšãã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšã瀺ãããŠããããã®äŸã§ã¯ãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã¯ç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã¯æåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããŠããããŸããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã¯ãã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒã§ãããäŸãã°ãããŒã¿ããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒãïŒãïŒãïŒã®ããããã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒµïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã§éä¿¡ãããããŸããäŸãã°ãããŒã¿ããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒïœïŒã®ããããã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒµïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã§éä¿¡ãããã
FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the UL band. Referring to FIG. 22, an FDD DL band subframe and an FDD UL band subframe are shown. In this example, the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The UL / DL configuration for the UL band is
ããªããåœç¶ãªãããïŒäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããïŒäžèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ããã®äŸã«éãããªããäŸãã°ãäžèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®éã§å ±éã®ä»»æã®ïŒµïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ãã£ãŠãããã Of course, the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the DL data) is not limited to this example. For example, the subframe may be an arbitrary UL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
ããã®ããã«ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ããããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ããã
Thus, for example, the
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã瀺ãæ
å ±ïŒä»¥äžãããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³æ
å ±ããšåŒã¶ïŒã§ããã
(A-3) DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information For example, the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information includes information indicating the first UL / DL configuration candidate (hereinafter referred to as âDL reference UL / DLâ). Called configuration information).
ãäžè¿°ããããã«ãäžäŸãšããŠãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ãå³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒïœïŒã®ãã¡ã®ïŒã€ä»¥äžã§ãããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã¯ãã€ã³ããã¯ã¹ïŒïœïŒã®ããããã§ããã
As described above, as an example, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are two or more of the
ããªããåœç¶ãªãããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ å ±ã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ãªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³æ å ±ã«éããããä»ã®æ å ±ã§ãã£ãŠããããäžäŸãšããŠãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ å ±ã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ãç€ºãæ å ±ã§ãã£ãŠããããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããããŒãã«ã®ããããã®è¡ã«çžåœããæ å ±ã§ãã£ãŠãããã Of course, the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is not limited to the DL reference UL / DL configuration information, and may be other information. As an example, the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information may be information indicating a subframe in which ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted when the operation mode is the second mode. Specifically, it may be information corresponding to any row of the table shown in FIG.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒéç¥ææ³
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåå¥ã®ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã«ãããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããäžäŸãšããŠãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ç¶æ
ãã¢ã€ãã«ç¶æ
ããæ¥ç¶ç¶æ
ãžé·ç§»ããéã«ãäžèšåå¥ã®ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã«ãããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšåå¥ã®ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã¯ãã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã§ããã
(A-4) Notification method For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the
ããªããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã®äžã§ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããŠããããåœè©²ã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã§éä¿¡ãããã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã§ãã£ãŠããããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã§éä¿¡ãããã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã§ãã£ãŠãããã
Note that the base station 100 (control unit 153) may notify the
ãïŒïœïŒã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ïŒä»¥äžããïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ããšåŒã¶ïŒãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããã
(B) Subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for uplink data For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits ACK / NACK for UL data when the operation mode is the second mode. The
ãäžæ¹ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
çœ®ïŒæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ãååŸãããããã«ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠåä¿¡ããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®åä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãã
On the other hand, for example, the terminal device (information acquisition unit 241) acquires the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information. Further, for example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the
ãããã«ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«ïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãé©åã«åä¿¡ããããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã Thus, for example, when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, it becomes possible to appropriately receive ACK / NACK for UL data.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããŒã¿
ãäžèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã§ããã
(B-1) Uplink data The uplink data is UL data transmitted in the UL band.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒãµããã¬ãŒã
ãäŸãã°ãïŒäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããïŒäžèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®éã§å
±éã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ãããäŸãã°ãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãçŽç²ãªïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã®ã¿ã§ã¯ãªããã¹ãã·ã£ã«ãµããã¬ãŒã ãå«ããããã«ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®äžã§å€æŽããããšããŠããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã確å®ã«åä¿¡ããããšãå¯èœã«ãªããäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã倿ŽåŸã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãç¥ãåã«ãåœè©²å€æŽåŸã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãé©çšããããšããŠãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ããµããã¬ãŒã ã§åä¿¡ããããšãã§ããã
(B-2) Subframe For example, the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is a DL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. For example, the DL subframe includes not only a pure DL subframe but also a special subframe. Thereby, for example, even if the UL / DL configuration for the UL band is changed among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates, it is possible to reliably receive ACK / NACK for UL data. Become. For example, even if the changed UL / DL configuration is applied before the
ãããå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãïŒäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããïŒäžèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®ãã¡ã®ç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®ããã«å®çŸ©ããããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡çšã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããããã®ãããªå Žåã«ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãšåŒã°ãåŸãã以äžãå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®ããã«å®çŸ©ããããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡çšã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã®äŸã説æããã
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®ããã«å®çŸ©ããããµããã¬ãŒã ã®äžäŸã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ãããšããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã®ããã«å®çŸ©ããããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡çšã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã瀺ãããŠããããã®ããŒãã«ã¯ãïŒïŒ§ïŒ°ïŒ°ããïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒã«å«ãŸããïœïœïœïœ
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãšåããã®ã§ãããäŸãã°ãã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒã§ã¯ãããŒã¿ãããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ãïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åŸã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒå³ã¡ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã§éä¿¡ãããããŸããã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒã§ã¯ãããŒã¿ãããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ãïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åŸã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒå³ã¡ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã§éä¿¡ããããåæ§ã«ãããŒã¿ãããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒãïŒãïŒãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ããããããïŒïŒïŒãïŒãïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åŸã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒå³ã¡ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒãïŒãïŒãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã§éä¿¡ãããããã®ããã«ãã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒã®ããã«ã¯ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒãïŒãïŒãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡çšã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšããŠå®çŸ©ãããŠããã
More specifically, for example, the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is for a second UL / DL configuration candidate among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. It is a defined subframe for transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data. In such a case, the second UL / DL configuration candidate may be referred to as a UL reference UL / DL configuration. Hereinafter, an example of subframes (subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for UL data) defined for UL reference UL / DL configuration will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of subframes defined for UL reference UL / DL configuration. Referring to FIG. 23, there is shown a subframe for transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data, defined for UL reference UL / DL configuration. This table is the same as Table 9.1.2-1 included in 3GPP TS 36.213. For example, in the
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®ãã¡ã®ããµããã¬ãŒã ã®æ°ãæå°ã§ããïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã§ãããäŸãã°ãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãçŽç²ãªïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã®ã¿ã§ã¯ãªããã¹ãã·ã£ã«ãµããã¬ãŒã ãå«ããäžäŸãšããŠãäžè¿°ããããã«ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ãå³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒãïŒãïŒãïŒã§ããããã®å Žåã«ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ãå³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒã§ãããããã«ããã®å Žåã«ãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããããã«ããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒãïŒãïŒãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããã以äžãå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®äŸã説æããã
For example, the second UL / DL configuration candidate is the UL / DL configuration candidate having the smallest number of DL subframes among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. For example, the DL subframe includes not only a pure DL subframe but also a special subframe. As an example, as described above, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are the
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ã垯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®äžäŸã説æããããã®èª¬æå³ã§ãããå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ãããšãã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ãšã瀺ãããŠããããã®äŸã§ã¯ãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã¯ç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã¯æåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããŠããããŸããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã¯ãã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒã§ãããäŸãã°ãããŒã¿ããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã§éä¿¡ãããããŸããäŸãã°ãããŒã¿ããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã§éä¿¡ããããšãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã çªå·ãïŒã§ãããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã§éä¿¡ãããã
FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data transmitted in the UL band. Referring to FIG. 24, an FDD DL band subframe and an FDD UL band subframe are shown. In this example, the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The UL / DL configuration for the UL band is
ããªããåœç¶ãªãããïŒäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããïŒäžèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ããã®äŸã«éãããªããäŸãã°ãäžèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®éã§å ±éã®ä»»æã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ãã£ãŠãããã Of course, the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is not limited to this example. For example, the subframe may be any DL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
ããã®ããã«ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ããããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ããã
Thus, for example, the
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±
ãäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã瀺ãæ
å ±ïŒä»¥äžãããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³æ
å ±ããšåŒã¶ïŒã§ããã
(B-3) UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information For example, the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information includes information indicating the second UL / DL configuration candidate (hereinafter referred to as âUL reference UL / DLâ). Called configuration information).
ãäžè¿°ããããã«ãäžäŸãšããŠãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ãå³ïŒã«ç€ºãããã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ïŒïœïŒã®ãã¡ã®ïŒã€ä»¥äžã§ãããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã¯ãã€ã³ããã¯ã¹ïŒïœïŒã®ããããã§ããã
As described above, as an example, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are two or more of the
ããªããåœç¶ãªãããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ å ±ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ãªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³æ å ±ã«éããããä»ã®æ å ±ã§ãã£ãŠããããäžäŸãšããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ å ±ã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ãç€ºãæ å ±ã§ãã£ãŠããããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºãããããŒãã«ã®ããããã®è¡ã«çžåœããæ å ±ã§ãã£ãŠãããã Of course, the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is not limited to the UL reference UL / DL configuration information, and may be other information. For example, the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information may be information indicating a subframe in which ACK / NACK for UL data is transmitted when the operation mode is the second mode. Specifically, it may be information corresponding to any row of the table shown in FIG.
ãïŒïœïŒïŒïŒéç¥ææ³
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåå¥ã®ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã«ãããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããäžäŸãšããŠãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ç¶æ
ãã¢ã€ãã«ç¶æ
ããæ¥ç¶ç¶æ
ãžé·ç§»ããéã«ãäžèšåå¥ã®ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã«ãããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšåå¥ã®ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã¯ãã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã§ããã
(B-4) Notification Method For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the
ããªããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã®äžã§ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããŠããããåœè©²ã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã§éä¿¡ãããã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã§ãã£ãŠããããäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã§éä¿¡ãããã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã§ãã£ãŠãããã
Note that the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may notify the
ãïŒïŒïŒãã®ä»
ãïŒïœïŒæž¬å®ïŒmeasurementsïŒ
ãäžè¿°ããããã«ãäŸãã°ãïŒäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããïŒäžèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãäžèšè€æ°ã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®éã§å
±éã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ãããäŸãã°ãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãçŽç²ãªïŒ€ïŒ¬ãµããã¬ãŒã ã®ã¿ã§ã¯ãªããã¹ãã·ã£ã«ãµããã¬ãŒã ãå«ãããã®å Žåã«ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®æž¬å®ãå¶åŸ¡ããã
(4) Others (a) Measurements
As described above, for example, the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is a DL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. For example, the DL subframe includes not only a pure DL subframe but also a special subframe. In this case, for example, the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) controls the measurement for the UL band based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information.
ãå
·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããïŒäžèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã§äžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ããããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ä¿¡å·ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®æž¬å®ãè¡ããäŸãã°ãäžèšãªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ä¿¡å·ã¯ãïŒCell-specificãReferenceãSignalïŒã§ãããäžèšæž¬å®ã¯ãïŒReferenceãSignalãReceivedãPowerïŒåã³ïŒåã¯ïŒ²ïŒ³ïŒ²ïŒ±ïŒReferenceãSignalãReceivedãQualityïŒã®æž¬å®ã§ããã
Specifically, for example, the
ãããã«ãããäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ä¿¡å·ã確å®ã«éä¿¡ããããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒå³ã¡ããµããã¬ãŒã ïŒã察象ãšããŠæž¬å®ãè¡ãããšãå¯èœã«ãªãããã®ãããäŸãã°ã枬å®ã®èª€ããåé¿ãããã
Thereby, for example, the
ãïŒïœïŒã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ãããã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒïœç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã®ããããã«ãããã©ã³ãã ã¢ã¯ã»ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æãšåãã§ããããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(B) Random access The description of random access in the fifth embodiment is the same as the description of random access in any of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœïŒåæä¿¡å·
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ãããåæä¿¡å·ã®éä¿¡ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒïœç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã®ããããã«ãããåæä¿¡å·ã®éä¿¡ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æãšåãã§ããããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(C) Synchronization signal The description of the transmission of the synchronization signal in the fifth embodiment is the same as the description of the transmission of the synchronization signal in any of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœïŒã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ãããã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒïœç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã®ããããã«ãããã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æãšåãã§ããããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(D) Scheduling The description of scheduling in the fifth embodiment is the same as the description of scheduling in any of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïœ
ïŒã±ã€ãããªãã£æ
å ±ã®éç¥
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ãããã±ã€ãããªãã£æ
å ±ã®éç¥ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æã¯ã第ïŒïœç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã®ããããã«ãããã±ã€ãããªãã£æ
å ±ã®éç¥ã«ã€ããŠã®èª¬æãšåãã§ããããã£ãŠãããã§ã¯éè€ããèšèŒãçç¥ããã
(E) Notification of capability information The description of the capability information notification in the fifth embodiment is the same as the description of the capability information notification in any of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒåŠçã®æµãïŒ
ãæ¬¡ã«ãå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãåŠçã®äŸã説æãããå³ïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãåŠçã®æŠç¥çãªæµãã®äžäŸã瀺ãã·ãŒã±ã³ã¹å³ã§ããããªããåœè©²åŠçã®èª¬æã«ãããŠãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã¯ãæåã«ã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã«ãªã£ãŠãããã®ãšããã
<8.3. Flow of processing>
Next, an example of processing according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of a process according to the fifth embodiment. In the description of the processing, it is assumed that the operation mode for the UL band of the FDD is first the first mode.
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ã§ãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããã¢ãŒãã§ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã¯ããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã瀺ãæ
å ±ã§ããã
The base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ã§ãããäŸãã°ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã¯ããªãã¡ã¬ã³ã¹ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã瀺ãæ
å ±ã§ããã
The base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã¯ã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®äžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ã§ããããšããããäžèšã¢ãŒãåæ¿ãæ
å ±ã¯ãäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããžã®äžèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšãããã¢ãŒãã§ããã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããžåãæ¿ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããŒã¿ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããããããã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãããŒã¿ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããããããšã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã
The
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãããŒã¿ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒããããšãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã ã§ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãåä¿¡ããã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã倿ŽããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã
The
ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããŒã¿ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããããããã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãããŒã¿ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããããããšã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã
The
ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãããŒã¿ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒããããšãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããµããã¬ãŒã ã§ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãžéä¿¡ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãåä¿¡ããã
The
ããªããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããããã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã§ã倿ŽãããïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ã¯ãïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒïŒåã«ãäžèšå€æŽãããïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãéç¥ãããŠããããïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒïŒåŸã«ãäžèšå€æŽãããïŒïŒ€ïŒ¬ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ãéç¥ãããŠãããããããã«ããã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããããšãã§ãïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãµããã¬ãŒã é¢é£æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®äžèšïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãåä¿¡ããããšãã§ããïŒïŒ³ïŒïŒïŒïŒã
Note that the
ã以äžã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã説æããã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã«ããã°ãäŸãã°ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«åœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãããšãå¯èœã«ãªãã The fourth embodiment has been described above. According to the fifth embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
ãããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãé©åã«éä¿¡ãããããŸããäŸãã°ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«ïŒµïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãé©åã«éä¿¡ãããã More specifically, for example, when the UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in time division, ACK / NACK for DL data is appropriately transmitted. For example, when the UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, ACK / NACK for UL data is appropriately transmitted.
ã第ïŒïœç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã®ãã¡ã®ãããããšç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ãšãçµã¿åããããŠããããå ·äœçã«ã¯ã第ïŒïœç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã®ããããã«ãããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒç¹ã«ãå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã«ãããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒïŒç¹ã«ãå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã®åäœãè¡ã£ãŠãããããŸãã第ïŒïœç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã®ããããã«ããã端æ«è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒç¹ã«ãå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ ã«ããã端æ«è£ 眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒïŒã®åäœãè¡ã£ãŠãããã Any one of the first to fourth embodiments may be combined with the fifth embodiment. Specifically, the base station 100 (especially the control unit 153) in any of the first to fourth embodiments performs the operation of the base station 100 (especially the control unit 153) in the fifth embodiment. Also good. Further, the terminal device 200 (especially the control unit 243) in any of the first to fourth embodiments may perform the operation of the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) in the fifth embodiment.
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒå¿çšäŸïŒïŒ
ãæ¬é瀺ã«ä¿ãæè¡ã¯ãæ§ã
ãªè£œåãžå¿çšå¯èœã§ãããäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããã¯ãïœ
åã¯ã¹ã¢ãŒã«ïœ
ãªã©ã®ããããã®çš®é¡ã®ïœ
ïŒevolvedãNodeãBïŒãšããŠå®çŸãããŠããããã¹ã¢ãŒã«ïœ
ã¯ããã³ïœ
ããã€ã¯ãïœ
åã¯ããŒã ïŒãã§ã ãïŒïœ
ãªã©ã®ããã¯ãã»ã«ãããå°ããã»ã«ãã«ããŒããïœ
ã§ãã£ãŠããããã®ä»£ããã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïœïœïœ
åã¯ïŒ¢ïŒŽïŒ³ïŒBaseãTransceiverãStationïŒãªã©ã®ä»ã®çš®é¡ã®åºå°å±ãšããŠå®çŸãããŠããããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ãå¶åŸ¡ããæ¬äœïŒåºå°å±è£
眮ãšãããïŒãšãæ¬äœãšã¯å¥ã®å Žæã«é
眮ãããïŒã€ä»¥äžã®ïŒ²ïŒ²ïŒšïŒRemoteãRadioãHeadïŒãšãå«ãã§ãããããŸããåŸè¿°ããæ§ã
ãªçš®é¡ã®ç«¯æ«ãäžæçã«åã¯åæ°žç¶çã«åºå°å±æ©èœãå®è¡ããããšã«ãããåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒãšããŠåäœããŠããããããã«ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã®å°ãªããšãäžéšã®æ§æèŠçŽ ã¯ãåºå°å±è£
眮åã¯åºå°å±è£
眮ã®ããã®ã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã«ãããŠå®çŸãããŠãããã
<< 9. Application example >>
The technology according to the present disclosure can be applied to various products. For example, the
ããŸããäŸãã°ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¹ããŒããã©ã³ãã¿ãã¬ããïŒPersonalãComputerïŒãããŒãïŒ°ïŒ£ãæºåž¯åã²ãŒã 端æ«ãæºåž¯åïŒãã³ã°ã«åã®ã¢ãã€ã«ã«ãŒã¿è¥ããã¯ããžã¿ã«ã«ã¡ã©ãªã©ã®ã¢ãã€ã«ç«¯æ«ãåã¯ã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ãªã©ã®è»èŒç«¯æ«ãšããŠå®çŸãããŠãããããŸãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒïŒïŒïŒMachineãToãMachineïŒéä¿¡ãè¡ã端æ«ïŒïŒïŒŽïŒ£ïŒMachineãTypeãCommunicationïŒç«¯æ«ãšãããïŒãšããŠå®çŸãããŠããããããã«ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®å°ãªããšãäžéšã®æ§æèŠçŽ ã¯ãããã端æ«ã«æèŒãããã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒã€ã®ãã€ã§æ§æãããéç©åè·¯ã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ïŒã«ãããŠå®çŸãããŠãããã
Further, for example, the
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒåºå°å±ã«é¢ããå¿çšäŸïŒ
ãïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å¿çšäŸïŒ
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ãæ¬é瀺ã«ä¿ãæè¡ãé©çšããåŸãïœ
ïŒ®ïŒ¢ã®æŠç¥çãªæ§æã®ç¬¬ïŒã®äŸã瀺ããããã¯å³ã§ãããïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒã€ä»¥äžã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãåã³åºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãæãããåã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒåã³åºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã±ãŒãã«ãä»ããŠäºãã«æ¥ç¶ããåŸãã
<9.1. Application examples for base stations>
(First application example)
FIG. 26 is a block diagram illustrating a first example of a schematic configuration of an eNB to which the technology according to the present disclosure may be applied. The
ãã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒã®åã
ã¯ãåäžã®åã¯è€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããçŽ åïŒäŸãã°ãïŒïŒ©ïŒïŒ¯ã¢ã³ãããæ§æããè€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããçŽ åïŒãæããåºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ããç¡ç·ä¿¡å·ã®éåä¿¡ã®ããã«äœ¿çšããããïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããããã«è€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãæããè€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã䜿çšããè€æ°ã®åšæ³¢æ°åž¯åã«ãããã察å¿ããŠãããããªããå³ïŒïŒã«ã¯ïœ
ïŒïŒïŒãè€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãæããäŸã瀺ããããïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã¯åäžã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãæããŠãããã
Each of the
ãåºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒãã¡ã¢ãªïŒïŒïŒããããã¯ãŒã¯ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒåã³ç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãåããã
The
ãã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµåã¯ïŒ€ïŒ³ïŒ°ã§ãã£ãŠãããåºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®äžäœã¬ã€ã€ã®æ§ã
ãªæ©èœãåäœããããäŸãã°ãã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«ããåŠçãããä¿¡å·å
ã®ããŒã¿ããããŒã¿ãã±ãããçæããçæãããã±ããããããã¯ãŒã¯ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠè»¢éãããã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãè€æ°ã®ããŒã¹ãã³ãããã»ããµããã®ããŒã¿ããã³ããªã³ã°ããããšã«ãããã³ãã«ããã±ãããçæããçæãããã³ãã«ããã±ããã転éããŠãããããŸããã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·ãªãœãŒã¹ç®¡çïŒRadioãResourceãControlïŒãç¡ç·ãã¢ã©å¶åŸ¡ïŒRadioãBearerãControlïŒãç§»åæ§ç®¡çïŒMobilityãManagementïŒãæµå
¥å¶åŸ¡ïŒAdmissionãControlïŒåã¯ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°ïŒSchedulingïŒãªã©ã®å¶åŸ¡ãå®è¡ããè«ççãªæ©èœãæããŠãããããŸããåœè©²å¶åŸ¡ã¯ãåšèŸºã®ïœ
åã¯ã³ã¢ãããã¯ãŒã¯ããŒããšé£æºããŠå®è¡ãããŠããããã¡ã¢ãªïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒåã³ïŒ²ïŒ¯ïŒãå«ã¿ãã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒã«ããå®è¡ãããããã°ã©ã ãåã³æ§ã
ãªå¶åŸ¡ããŒã¿ïŒäŸãã°ã端æ«ãªã¹ããéä¿¡é»åããŒã¿åã³ã¹ã±ãžã¥ãŒãªã³ã°ããŒã¿ãªã©ïŒãèšæ¶ããã
The
ããããã¯ãŒã¯ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãã³ã¢ãããã¯ãŒã¯ïŒïŒïŒã«æ¥ç¶ããããã®éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ã§ãããã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããããã¯ãŒã¯ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠãã³ã¢ãããã¯ãŒã¯ããŒãåã¯ä»ã®ïœ
ãšéä¿¡ããŠãããããã®å Žåã«ãïœ
ïŒïŒïŒãšãã³ã¢ãããã¯ãŒã¯ããŒãåã¯ä»ã®ïœ
ãšã¯ãè«ççãªã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹åã¯ïŒžïŒã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒã«ããäºãã«æ¥ç¶ãããŠãããããããã¯ãŒã¯ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãæç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ã§ãã£ãŠããããåã¯ç¡ç·ããã¯ããŒã«ã®ããã®ç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ã§ãã£ãŠãããããããã¯ãŒã¯ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ã§ããå Žåããããã¯ãŒã¯ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«ãã䜿çšãããåšæ³¢æ°åž¯åãããããé«ãåšæ³¢æ°åž¯åãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã«äœ¿çšããŠãããã
The
ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒLongãTermãEvolutionïŒåã¯ïŒ¬ïŒŽïŒ¥ïŒïŒ¡ïœïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœãªã©ã®ããããã®ã»ã«ã©ãŒéä¿¡æ¹åŒããµããŒãããã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠãïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã®ã»ã«å
ã«äœçœ®ãã端æ«ã«ç¡ç·æ¥ç¶ãæäŸãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå
žåçã«ã¯ãããŒã¹ãã³ãïŒïŒ¢ïŒ¢ïŒããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãªã©ãå«ã¿åŸããããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ã笊å·åïŒåŸ©å·ãå€èª¿ïŒåŸ©èª¿åã³å€éåïŒéå€éåãªã©ãè¡ãªã£ãŠãããåã¬ã€ã€ïŒäŸãã°ãïŒãïŒïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒMediumãAccessãControlïŒãïŒRadioãLinkãControlïŒåã³ïŒ°ïŒ€ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒPacketãDataãConvergenceãProtocolïŒïŒã®æ§ã
ãªä¿¡å·åŠçãå®è¡ãããããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒã®ä»£ããã«ãäžè¿°ããè«ççãªæ©èœã®äžéšåã¯å
šéšãæããŠããããããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãéä¿¡å¶åŸ¡ããã°ã©ã ãèšæ¶ããã¡ã¢ãªãåœè©²ããã°ã©ã ãå®è¡ããããã»ããµåã³é¢é£ããåè·¯ãå«ãã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã§ãã£ãŠããããããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒã®æ©èœã¯ãäžèšããã°ã©ã ã®ã¢ããããŒãã«ãã倿Žå¯èœã§ãã£ãŠãããããŸããäžèšã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã¯ãåºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ã¹ãããã«æ¿å
¥ãããã«ãŒãè¥ããã¯ãã¬ãŒãã§ãã£ãŠããããåã¯äžèšã«ãŒãè¥ããã¯äžèšãã¬ãŒãã«æèŒããããããã§ãã£ãŠããããäžæ¹ãåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããããµããã£ã«ã¿åã³ã¢ã³ããªã©ãå«ãã§ããããã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠç¡ç·ä¿¡å·ãéåä¿¡ããã
The
ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããããã«è€æ°ã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒãå«ã¿ãè€æ°ã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã䜿çšããè€æ°ã®åšæ³¢æ°åž¯åã«ãããã察å¿ããŠãããããŸããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããããã«è€æ°ã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãå«ã¿ãè€æ°ã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°è€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããçŽ åã«ãããã察å¿ããŠãããããªããå³ïŒïŒã«ã¯ç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãè€æ°ã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã³è€æ°ã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãäŸã瀺ããããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯åäžã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã¯åäžã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãã§ãããã
The
ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠãå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠèª¬æããåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠãããããããã¯ããããã®æ§æèŠçŽ ã®å°ãªããšãäžéšã¯ãã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠããããäžäŸãšããŠãïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã®äžéšïŒäŸãã°ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒïŒè¥ããã¯å
šéšãåã³ïŒåã¯ã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ãæèŒããåœè©²ã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã«ãããŠåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãå®è£
ãããŠãããããã®å Žåã«ãäžèšã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã¯ãããã»ããµãåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããŠæ©èœãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ïŒæèšãããšãããã»ããµã«åæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã®åäœãå®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ïŒãèšæ¶ããåœè©²ããã°ã©ã ãå®è¡ããŠããããå¥ã®äŸãšããŠãããã»ããµãåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããŠæ©èœãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã«ã€ã³ã¹ããŒã«ãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒïŒäŸãã°ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯ã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ããã°ã©ã ãå®è¡ããŠãããã以äžã®ããã«ãåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãåããè£
眮ãšããŠïœ
ïŒïŒïŒãåºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒåã¯äžèšã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ãæäŸãããŠããããããã»ããµãåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããŠæ©èœãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãæäŸãããŠãããããŸããäžèšããã°ã©ã ãèšé²ããèªã¿åãå¯èœãªèšé²åªäœãæäŸãããŠãããã
26, the
ããŸããå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠãå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠèª¬æããç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒïŒäŸãã°ãåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠãããããŸããã¢ã³ããéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠãããããŸãããããã¯ãŒã¯éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯ãããã¯ãŒã¯ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠãããã
26, the
ãïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å¿çšäŸïŒ
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ãæ¬é瀺ã«ä¿ãæè¡ãé©çšããåŸãïœ
ïŒ®ïŒ¢ã®æŠç¥çãªæ§æã®ç¬¬ïŒã®äŸã瀺ããããã¯å³ã§ãããïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒã€ä»¥äžã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãåºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãåã³ïŒ²ïŒ²ïŒšïŒïŒïŒãæãããåã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒ²ïŒ²ïŒšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã±ãŒãã«ãä»ããŠäºãã«æ¥ç¶ããåŸãããŸããåºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒ²ïŒ²ïŒšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå
ãã¡ã€ãã±ãŒãã«ãªã©ã®é«éåç·ã§äºãã«æ¥ç¶ããåŸãã
(Second application example)
FIG. 27 is a block diagram illustrating a second example of a schematic configuration of an eNB to which the technology according to the present disclosure may be applied. The
ãã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒã®åã
ã¯ãåäžã®åã¯è€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããçŽ åïŒäŸãã°ãïŒïŒ©ïŒïŒ¯ã¢ã³ãããæ§æããè€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããçŽ åïŒãæããïŒïŒïŒã«ããç¡ç·ä¿¡å·ã®éåä¿¡ã®ããã«äœ¿çšããããïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããããã«è€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãæããè€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã䜿çšããè€æ°ã®åšæ³¢æ°åž¯åã«ãããã察å¿ããŠãããããªããå³ïŒïŒã«ã¯ïœ
ïŒïŒïŒãè€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãæããäŸã瀺ããããïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã¯åäžã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãæããŠãããã
Each of the
ãåºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒãã¡ã¢ãªïŒïŒïŒããããã¯ãŒã¯ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒåã³æ¥ç¶ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãåãããã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒãã¡ã¢ãªïŒïŒïŒåã³ãããã¯ãŒã¯ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠèª¬æããã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒãã¡ã¢ãªïŒïŒïŒåã³ãããã¯ãŒã¯ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãšåæ§ã®ãã®ã§ããã
The
ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåã¯ïŒ¬ïŒŽïŒ¥ïŒïŒ¡ïœïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœãªã©ã®ããããã®ã»ã«ã©ãŒéä¿¡æ¹åŒããµããŒãããïŒïŒïŒåã³ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠãïŒïŒïŒã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã»ã¯ã¿å
ã«äœçœ®ãã端æ«ã«ç¡ç·æ¥ç¶ãæäŸãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå
žåçã«ã¯ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒãªã©ãå«ã¿åŸããããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãæ¥ç¶ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠïŒ²ïŒ²ïŒšïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãšæ¥ç¶ãããããšãé€ããå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠèª¬æããããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒãšåæ§ã®ãã®ã§ãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããããã«è€æ°ã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒãå«ã¿ãè€æ°ã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã䜿çšããè€æ°ã®åšæ³¢æ°åž¯åã«ãããã察å¿ããŠãããããªããå³ïŒïŒã«ã¯ç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãè€æ°ã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒãå«ãäŸã瀺ããããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯åäžã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒãå«ãã§ãããã
The
ãæ¥ç¶ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒïŒãïŒïŒïŒãšæ¥ç¶ããããã®ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ã§ãããæ¥ç¶ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒïŒç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒïŒãšïŒ²ïŒ²ïŒšïŒïŒïŒãšãæ¥ç¶ããäžèšé«éåç·ã§ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã®éä¿¡ã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã§ãã£ãŠãããã
The
ããŸããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãæ¥ç¶ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒåã³ç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãåããã
In addition, the
ãæ¥ç¶ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒïŒïŒïŒç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒïŒãåºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãšæ¥ç¶ããããã®ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ã§ãããæ¥ç¶ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšé«éåç·ã§ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã®éä¿¡ã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã§ãã£ãŠãããã
The
ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠç¡ç·ä¿¡å·ãéåä¿¡ãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå
žåçã«ã¯ãåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãªã©ãå«ã¿åŸããåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããããµããã£ã«ã¿åã³ã¢ã³ããªã©ãå«ãã§ããããã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠç¡ç·ä¿¡å·ãéåä¿¡ãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããããã«è€æ°ã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãå«ã¿ãè€æ°ã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°è€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããçŽ åã«ãããã察å¿ããŠãããããªããå³ïŒïŒã«ã¯ç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãè€æ°ã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãäŸã瀺ããããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯åäžã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãã§ãããã
The
ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠãå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠèª¬æããåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯ç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠãããããããã¯ããããã®æ§æèŠçŽ ã®å°ãªããšãäžéšã¯ãã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠããããäžäŸãšããŠãïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã®äžéšïŒäŸãã°ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒïŒè¥ããã¯å
šéšãåã³ïŒåã¯ã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ãæèŒããåœè©²ã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã«ãããŠåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãå®è£
ãããŠãããããã®å Žåã«ãäžèšã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã¯ãããã»ããµãåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããŠæ©èœãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ïŒæèšãããšãããã»ããµã«åæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã®åäœãå®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ïŒãèšæ¶ããåœè©²ããã°ã©ã ãå®è¡ããŠããããå¥ã®äŸãšããŠãããã»ããµãåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããŠæ©èœãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã«ã€ã³ã¹ããŒã«ãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒïŒäŸãã°ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯ã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ããã°ã©ã ãå®è¡ããŠãããã以äžã®ããã«ãåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãåããè£
眮ãšããŠïœ
ïŒïŒïŒãåºå°å±è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒåã¯äžèšã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ãæäŸãããŠããããããã»ããµãåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããŠæ©èœãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãæäŸãããŠãããããŸããäžèšããã°ã©ã ãèšé²ããèªã¿åãå¯èœãªèšé²åªäœãæäŸãããŠãããã
In the
ããŸããå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããïœ
ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠãäŸãã°ãå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠèª¬æããç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒïŒäŸãã°ãåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠãããããŸããã¢ã³ããéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠãããããŸãããããã¯ãŒã¯éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯ãããã¯ãŒã¯ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠãããã
In the
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒç«¯æ«è£
眮ã«é¢ããå¿çšäŸïŒ
ãïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å¿çšäŸïŒ
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ãæ¬é瀺ã«ä¿ãæè¡ãé©çšããåŸãã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã®æŠç¥çãªæ§æã®äžäŸã瀺ããããã¯å³ã§ãããã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒãã¡ã¢ãªïŒïŒïŒãã¹ãã¬ãŒãžïŒïŒïŒãå€éšæ¥ç¶ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãã«ã¡ã©ïŒïŒïŒãã»ã³ãµïŒïŒïŒããã€ã¯ããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒãå
¥åããã€ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã衚瀺ããã€ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãã¹ããŒã«ïŒïŒïŒãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãïŒã€ä»¥äžã®ã¢ã³ããã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãïŒã€ä»¥äžã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒããã¹ïŒïŒïŒãããããªãŒïŒïŒïŒåã³è£å©ã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒãåããã
<9.2. Application examples related to terminal devices>
(First application example)
FIG. 28 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a
ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµåã¯ïŒ³ïœïŒ£ïŒSystemãonãChipïŒã§ãã£ãŠãããã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã®ã¢ããªã±ãŒã·ã§ã³ã¬ã€ã€åã³ãã®ä»ã®ã¬ã€ã€ã®æ©èœãå¶åŸ¡ãããã¡ã¢ãªïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒåã³ïŒ²ïŒ¯ïŒãå«ã¿ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒã«ããå®è¡ãããããã°ã©ã åã³ããŒã¿ãèšæ¶ãããã¹ãã¬ãŒãžïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåå°äœã¡ã¢ãªåã¯ããŒããã£ã¹ã¯ãªã©ã®èšæ¶åªäœãå«ã¿åŸããå€éšæ¥ç¶ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¡ã¢ãªãŒã«ãŒãåã¯ïŒµïŒ³ïŒ¢ïŒUniversalãSerialãBusïŒããã€ã¹ãªã©ã®å€ä»ãããã€ã¹ãã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒãžæ¥ç¶ããããã®ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ã§ããã
The
ãã«ã¡ã©ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ãïŒChargeãCoupledãDeviceïŒåã¯ïŒ£ïŒïŒ¯ïŒ³ïŒComplementaryãMetalãOxideãSemiconductorïŒãªã©ã®æ®åçŽ åãæããæ®åç»åãçæãããã»ã³ãµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ã枬äœã»ã³ãµããžã£ã€ãã»ã³ãµãå°ç£æ°ã»ã³ãµåã³å é床ã»ã³ãµãªã©ã®ã»ã³ãµçŸ€ãå«ã¿åŸãããã€ã¯ããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒãžå
¥åãããé³å£°ãé³å£°ä¿¡å·ãžå€æãããå
¥åããã€ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ã衚瀺ããã€ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã®ç»é¢äžãžã®ã¿ãããæ€åºããã¿ããã»ã³ãµãããŒããããããŒããŒãããã¿ã³åã¯ã¹ã€ãããªã©ãå«ã¿ããŠãŒã¶ããã®æäœåã¯æ
å ±å
¥åãåãä»ããã衚瀺ããã€ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãæ¶²æ¶ãã£ã¹ãã¬ã€ïŒïŒ¬ïŒ£ïŒ€ïŒåã¯ææ©çºå
ãã€ãªãŒãïŒïŒ¯ïŒ¬ïŒ¥ïŒ€ïŒãã£ã¹ãã¬ã€ãªã©ã®ç»é¢ãæããã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã®åºåç»åã衚瀺ãããã¹ããŒã«ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒããåºåãããé³å£°ä¿¡å·ãé³å£°ã«å€æããã
The
ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåã¯ïŒ¬ïŒŽïŒ¥ïŒïŒ¡ïœïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœãªã©ã®ããããã®ã»ã«ã©ãŒéä¿¡æ¹åŒããµããŒãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ãå®è¡ãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå
žåçã«ã¯ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãªã©ãå«ã¿åŸããããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ã笊å·åïŒåŸ©å·ãå€èª¿ïŒåŸ©èª¿åã³å€éåïŒéå€éåãªã©ãè¡ãªã£ãŠãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã®ããã®æ§ã
ãªä¿¡å·åŠçãå®è¡ãããäžæ¹ãåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããããµããã£ã«ã¿åã³ã¢ã³ããªã©ãå«ãã§ããããã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠç¡ç·ä¿¡å·ãéåä¿¡ãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãéç©ããã¯ã³ãããã®ã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã§ãã£ãŠããããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããããã«è€æ°ã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã³è€æ°ã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãã§ãããããªããå³ïŒïŒã«ã¯ç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãè€æ°ã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã³è€æ°ã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãäŸã瀺ããããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯åäžã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã¯åäžã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãã§ãããã
The
ãããã«ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã»ã«ã©ãŒéä¿¡æ¹åŒã«å ããŠãè¿è·é¢ç¡ç·éä¿¡æ¹åŒãè¿æ¥ç¡ç·éä¿¡æ¹åŒåã¯ç¡ç·ïŒ¬ïŒ¡ïŒ®ïŒLocalãAreaãNetworkïŒæ¹åŒãªã©ã®ä»ã®çš®é¡ã®ç¡ç·éä¿¡æ¹åŒããµããŒãããŠãããããã®å Žåã«ãç¡ç·éä¿¡æ¹åŒããšã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãã§ãããã
Furthermore, the
ãã¢ã³ããã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒã®åã
ã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«å«ãŸããè€æ°ã®åè·¯ïŒäŸãã°ãç°ãªãç¡ç·éä¿¡æ¹åŒã®ããã®åè·¯ïŒã®éã§ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒã®æ¥ç¶å
ãåãæ¿ããã
Each of the
ãã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒã®åã
ã¯ãåäžã®åã¯è€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããçŽ åïŒäŸãã°ãïŒïŒ©ïŒïŒ¯ã¢ã³ãããæ§æããè€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããçŽ åïŒãæããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«ããç¡ç·ä¿¡å·ã®éåä¿¡ã®ããã«äœ¿çšããããã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããããã«è€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãæããŠãããããªããå³ïŒïŒã«ã¯ã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒãè€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãæããäŸã瀺ããããã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã¯åäžã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãæããŠãããã
Each of the
ãããã«ãã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡æ¹åŒããšã«ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãåããŠãããããã®å Žåã«ãã¢ã³ããã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã®æ§æããçç¥ãããŠãããã
Furthermore, the
ããã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒãã¡ã¢ãªïŒïŒïŒãã¹ãã¬ãŒãžïŒïŒïŒãå€éšæ¥ç¶ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãã«ã¡ã©ïŒïŒïŒãã»ã³ãµïŒïŒïŒããã€ã¯ããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒãå
¥åããã€ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã衚瀺ããã€ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãã¹ããŒã«ïŒïŒïŒãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒåã³è£å©ã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒãäºãã«æ¥ç¶ãããããããªãŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³äžã«ç Žç·ã§éšåçã«ç€ºãã絊é»ã©ã€ã³ãä»ããŠãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã®åãããã¯ãžé»åãäŸçµŠãããè£å©ã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ãã¹ãªãŒãã¢ãŒãã«ãããŠãã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã®å¿
èŠæäœéã®æ©èœãåäœãããã
The
ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠãå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠèª¬æããæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠãããããããã¯ããããã®æ§æèŠçŽ ã®å°ãªããšãäžéšã¯ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã¯è£å©ã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠããããäžäŸãšããŠãã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã®äžéšïŒäŸãã°ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒïŒè¥ããã¯å
šéšãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒãåã³ïŒåã¯è£å©ã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ãæèŒããåœè©²ã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã«ãããŠæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãå®è£
ãããŠãããããã®å Žåã«ãäžèšã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã¯ãããã»ããµãæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããŠæ©èœãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ïŒæèšãããšãããã»ããµã«æ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã®åäœãå®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ïŒãèšæ¶ããåœè©²ããã°ã©ã ãå®è¡ããŠããããå¥ã®äŸãšããŠãããã»ããµãæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããŠæ©èœãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã«ã€ã³ã¹ããŒã«ãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒïŒäŸãã°ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒïŒãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒãåã³ïŒåã¯è£å©ã³ã³ãããŒã©ïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ããã°ã©ã ãå®è¡ããŠãããã以äžã®ããã«ãæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãåããè£
眮ãšããŠã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒåã¯äžèšã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ãæäŸãããŠããããããã»ããµãæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããŠæ©èœãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãæäŸãããŠãããããŸããäžèšããã°ã©ã ãèšé²ããèªã¿åãå¯èœãªèšé²åªäœãæäŸãããŠãããã
28, the
ããŸããå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããã¹ããŒããã©ã³ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠãäŸãã°ãå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠèª¬æããç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒïŒäŸãã°ãåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠãããããŸããã¢ã³ããéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠãããã
28, for example, the
ãïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å¿çšäŸïŒ
ãå³ïŒïŒã¯ãæ¬é瀺ã«ä¿ãæè¡ãé©çšããåŸãã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®æŠç¥çãªæ§æã®äžäŸã瀺ããããã¯å³ã§ãããã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒãã¡ã¢ãªïŒïŒïŒãïŒGlobalãPositioningãSystemïŒã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒãã»ã³ãµïŒïŒïŒãããŒã¿ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãã³ã³ãã³ããã¬ãŒã€ïŒïŒïŒãèšæ¶åªäœã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãå
¥åããã€ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã衚瀺ããã€ã¹ïŒïŒïŒãã¹ããŒã«ïŒïŒïŒãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãïŒã€ä»¥äžã®ã¢ã³ããã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒãïŒã€ä»¥äžã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒåã³ããããªãŒïŒïŒïŒãåããã
(Second application example)
FIG. 29 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a
ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ïŒ£ïŒ°ïŒµåã¯ïŒ³ïœïŒ£ã§ãã£ãŠãããã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³æ©èœåã³ãã®ä»ã®æ©èœãå¶åŸ¡ãããã¡ã¢ãªïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒåã³ïŒ²ïŒ¯ïŒãå«ã¿ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒã«ããå®è¡ãããããã°ã©ã åã³ããŒã¿ãèšæ¶ããã
The
ãã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãïŒ§ïŒ°ïŒ³è¡æããåä¿¡ããã信å·ãçšããŠãã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®äœçœ®ïŒäŸãã°ã緯床ãçµåºŠåã³é«åºŠïŒã枬å®ãããã»ã³ãµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ããžã£ã€ãã»ã³ãµãå°ç£æ°ã»ã³ãµåã³æ°å§ã»ã³ãµãªã©ã®ã»ã³ãµçŸ€ãå«ã¿åŸããããŒã¿ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ãå³ç€ºããªã端åãä»ããŠè»èŒãããã¯ãŒã¯ïŒïŒïŒã«æ¥ç¶ãããè»éããŒã¿ãªã©ã®è»äž¡åŽã§çæãããããŒã¿ãååŸããã
The
ãã³ã³ãã³ããã¬ãŒã€ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãèšæ¶åªäœã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«æ¿å
¥ãããèšæ¶åªäœïŒäŸãã°ãåã¯ïŒ€ïŒ¶ïŒ€ïŒã«èšæ¶ãããŠããã³ã³ãã³ããåçãããå
¥åããã€ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ã衚瀺ããã€ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã®ç»é¢äžãžã®ã¿ãããæ€åºããã¿ããã»ã³ãµããã¿ã³åã¯ã¹ã€ãããªã©ãå«ã¿ããŠãŒã¶ããã®æäœåã¯æ
å ±å
¥åãåãä»ããã衚瀺ããã€ã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåã¯ïŒ¯ïŒ¬ïŒ¥ïŒ€ãã£ã¹ãã¬ã€ãªã©ã®ç»é¢ãæããããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³æ©èœåã¯åçãããã³ã³ãã³ãã®ç»åã衚瀺ãããã¹ããŒã«ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³æ©èœåã¯åçãããã³ã³ãã³ãã®é³å£°ãåºåããã
The
ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãåã¯ïŒ¬ïŒŽïŒ¥ïŒïŒ¡ïœïœïœïœïœïœ
ïœãªã©ã®ããããã®ã»ã«ã©ãŒéä¿¡æ¹åŒããµããŒãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ãå®è¡ãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå
žåçã«ã¯ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãªã©ãå«ã¿åŸããããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäŸãã°ã笊å·åïŒåŸ©å·ãå€èª¿ïŒåŸ©èª¿åã³å€éåïŒéå€éåãªã©ãè¡ãªã£ãŠãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã®ããã®æ§ã
ãªä¿¡å·åŠçãå®è¡ãããäžæ¹ãåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒã¯ããããµããã£ã«ã¿åã³ã¢ã³ããªã©ãå«ãã§ããããã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãä»ããŠç¡ç·ä¿¡å·ãéåä¿¡ãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãéç©ããã¯ã³ãããã®ã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã§ãã£ãŠããããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããããã«è€æ°ã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã³è€æ°ã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãã§ãããããªããå³ïŒïŒã«ã¯ç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒãè€æ°ã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã³è€æ°ã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãäŸã瀺ããããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯åäžã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã¯åäžã®ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãã§ãããã
The
ãããã«ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã»ã«ã©ãŒéä¿¡æ¹åŒã«å ããŠãè¿è·é¢ç¡ç·éä¿¡æ¹åŒãè¿æ¥ç¡ç·éä¿¡æ¹åŒåã¯ç¡ç·ïŒ¬ïŒ¡ïŒ®æ¹åŒãªã©ã®ä»ã®çš®é¡ã®ç¡ç·éä¿¡æ¹åŒããµããŒãããŠãããããã®å Žåã«ãç¡ç·éä¿¡æ¹åŒããšã®ïŒ¢ïŒ¢ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒ²ïŒŠåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒãå«ãã§ãããã
Further, the
ãã¢ã³ããã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒã®åã
ã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«å«ãŸããè€æ°ã®åè·¯ïŒäŸãã°ãç°ãªãç¡ç·éä¿¡æ¹åŒã®ããã®åè·¯ïŒã®éã§ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒã®æ¥ç¶å
ãåãæ¿ããã
Each of the
ãã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒã®åã
ã¯ãåäžã®åã¯è€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããçŽ åïŒäŸãã°ãïŒïŒ©ïŒïŒ¯ã¢ã³ãããæ§æããè€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããçŽ åïŒãæããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«ããç¡ç·ä¿¡å·ã®éåä¿¡ã®ããã«äœ¿çšããããã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããããã«è€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãæããŠãããããªããå³ïŒïŒã«ã¯ã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒãè€æ°ã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãæããäŸã瀺ããããã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯åäžã®ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãæããŠãããã
Each of the
ãããã«ãã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡æ¹åŒããšã«ã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒãåããŠãããããã®å Žåã«ãã¢ã³ããã¹ã€ããïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®æ§æããçç¥ãããŠãããã
Furthermore, the
ãããããªãŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãå³äžã«ç Žç·ã§éšåçã«ç€ºãã絊é»ã©ã€ã³ãä»ããŠãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®åãããã¯ãžé»åãäŸçµŠããããŸããããããªãŒïŒïŒïŒã¯ãè»äž¡åŽãã絊é»ãããé»åãèç©ããã
The
ãå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠãå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠèª¬æããæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠãããããããã¯ããããã®æ§æèŠçŽ ã®å°ãªããšãäžéšã¯ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠããããäžäŸãšããŠãã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒã®äžéšïŒäŸãã°ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒïŒè¥ããã¯å
šéšåã³ïŒåã¯ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒãå«ãã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ãæèŒããåœè©²ã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã«ãããŠæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãå®è£
ãããŠãããããã®å Žåã«ãäžèšã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ã¯ãããã»ããµãæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããŠæ©èœãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ïŒæèšãããšãããã»ããµã«æ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã®åäœãå®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ïŒãèšæ¶ããåœè©²ããã°ã©ã ãå®è¡ããŠããããå¥ã®äŸãšããŠãããã»ããµãæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããŠæ©èœãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ã€ã³ã¹ããŒã«ãããç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒïŒäŸãã°ãããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯ããã»ããµïŒïŒïŒãåœè©²ããã°ã©ã ãå®è¡ããŠãããã以äžã®ããã«ãæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãåããè£
眮ãšããŠã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒåã¯äžèšã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ãæäŸãããŠããããããã»ããµãæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããŠæ©èœãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãæäŸãããŠãããããŸããäžèšããã°ã©ã ãèšé²ããèªã¿åãå¯èœãªèšé²åªäœãæäŸãããŠãããã
In the
ããŸããå³ïŒïŒã«ç€ºããã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠãäŸãã°ãå³ïŒãåç
§ããŠèª¬æããç¡ç·éä¿¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãç¡ç·éä¿¡ã€ã³ã¿ãã§ãŒã¹ïŒïŒïŒïŒäŸãã°ãåè·¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠãããããŸããã¢ã³ããéšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã¢ã³ããïŒïŒïŒã«ãããŠå®è£
ãããŠãããã
29, for example, the
ããŸããæ¬é瀺ã«ä¿ãæè¡ã¯ãäžè¿°ããã«ãŒããã²ãŒã·ã§ã³è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã®ïŒã€ä»¥äžã®ãããã¯ãšãè»èŒãããã¯ãŒã¯ïŒïŒïŒãšãè»äž¡åŽã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒãšãå«ãè»èŒã·ã¹ãã ïŒåã¯è»äž¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒãšããŠå®çŸãããŠããããå³ã¡ãæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒåã³ïŒåã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãåããè£
眮ãšããŠè»èŒã·ã¹ãã ïŒåã¯è»äž¡ïŒïŒïŒïŒãæäŸãããŠããããè»äž¡åŽã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãè»éããšã³ãžã³å転æ°åã¯æ
éæ
å ±ãªã©ã®è»äž¡åŽããŒã¿ãçæããçæããããŒã¿ãè»èŒãããã¯ãŒã¯ïŒïŒïŒãžåºåããã
Also, the technology according to the present disclosure may be realized as an in-vehicle system (or vehicle) 940 including one or more blocks of the
ãïŒïŒïŒïŒïŒãŸãšãïŒïŒ
ããããŸã§ãå³ïŒïœå³ïŒïŒãåç
§ããŠãæ¬é瀺ã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã«ä¿ãéä¿¡è£
眮åã³ååŠçã説æãããæ¬é瀺ã«ä¿ã宿œåœ¢æ
ã«ããã°ã
<< 10. Summary >>
Up to this point, the communication device and each process according to an embodiment of the present disclosure have been described with reference to FIGS. According to embodiments according to the present disclosure,
ãïŒïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒïœç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒãšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãåã³ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ïŒŽïŒ¡ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ãå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããåããã
(1) First to Fourth Embodiments In the first embodiment / second embodiment, the
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒãšãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåæãããå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããåããã
In the third embodiment, the
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããæ
å ±ååŸéšïŒïŒïŒãšãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããéä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããåä¿¡åã³ïŒ€ïŒ¬éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããåãããå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒã¯ãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããåã¯äžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããã«ããããäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ€ïŒ¬åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«åºã¥ããŠãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒµïŒ¬éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã
In the fourth embodiment, the
ãããã«ãããäŸãã°ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«åœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãããšãå¯èœã«ãªããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«ãåºå°å±ã«ãããåä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã®åæãå®çŸãããã Thereby, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band. Specifically, for example, when the UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station is realized.
ãïŒïŒïŒç¬¬ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã第ïŒã®å®æœåœ¢æ
ã§ã¯ãåºå°å±ïŒïŒïŒã¯ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããåã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãäžèšïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããåæ¿éšïŒïŒïŒãšãäžèšåäœã¢ãŒããäžèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ïŒ€ïŒ¬ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ãã端æ«è£
眮ïŒïŒïŒã«éç¥ããå¶åŸ¡éšïŒïŒïŒãšããåããã
(2) Fifth Embodiment In the fifth embodiment, the
ãããã«ãããäŸãã°ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«åœè©²ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åã«ãããŠããè¯å¥œã«ç¡ç·éä¿¡ãè¡ãããšãå¯èœã«ãªããå ·äœçã«ã¯ãäŸãã°ãã®ïŒµïŒ¬åž¯åãæåå²ã§ïŒ€ïŒ¬åã³ïŒµïŒ¬ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããå Žåã«ãããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãé©åã«éä¿¡ãããã Thereby, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band. Specifically, for example, when the UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in time division, ACK / NACK for DL data is appropriately transmitted.
ã以äžãæ·»ä»å³é¢ãåç §ããªããæ¬é瀺ã®å¥œé©ãªå®æœåœ¢æ ã説æããããæ¬é瀺ã¯ä¿ãäŸã«éå®ãããªãããšã¯èšããŸã§ããªããåœæ¥è ã§ããã°ãç¹èš±è«æ±ã®ç¯å²ã«èšèŒãããç¯çå ã«ãããŠãåçš®ã®å€æŽäŸåã¯ä¿®æ£äŸã«æ³å°ãåŸãããšã¯æããã§ããããããã«ã€ããŠãåœç¶ã«æ¬éç€ºã®æè¡çç¯å²ã«å±ãããã®ãšäºè§£ãããã As mentioned above, although preferred embodiment of this indication was described referring an accompanying drawing, it cannot be overemphasized that this indication is not limited to the example concerned. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made within the scope of the claims, and these are naturally within the technical scope of the present disclosure. Understood.
ãäŸãã°ãåºå°å±åã³ç«¯æ«è£ 眮ãå«ãã·ã¹ãã ããïŒïŒ¡ïœïœïœïœïœïœ ïœãåã¯ãããã«æºããéä¿¡èŠæ Œã«æºæ ããã·ã¹ãã ã§ããäŸã説æããããæ¬é瀺ã¯ä¿ãäŸã«éå®ãããªããäŸãã°ãã·ã¹ãã ã¯ãä»ã®éä¿¡èŠæ Œã«æºæ ããã·ã¹ãã ã§ãã£ãŠãããã For example, although the example in which the system including the base station and the terminal device is a system compliant with LTE, LTE-Advanced, or a communication standard based on these has been described, the present disclosure is not limited to such an example. For example, the system may be a system that complies with other communication standards.
ããŸããæ¬æçްæžã®åŠçã«ãããåŠçã¹ãããã¯ãå¿ ããããããŒãã£ãŒãåã¯ã·ãŒã±ã³ã¹å³ã«èšèŒãããé åºã«æ²¿ã£ãŠæç³»åã«å®è¡ãããªããŠãããäŸãã°ãåŠçã«ãããåŠçã¹ãããã¯ããããŒãã£ãŒãåã¯ã·ãŒã±ã³ã¹å³ãšããŠèšèŒããé åºãšç°ãªãé åºã§å®è¡ãããŠãã䞊åçã«å®è¡ãããŠãããã In addition, the processing steps in the processing of the present specification do not necessarily have to be executed in time series according to the order described in the flowchart or the sequence diagram. For example, the processing steps in the processing may be executed in an order different from the order described as a flowchart or a sequence diagram, or may be executed in parallel.
ããŸããæ¬æçްæžã®è£ 眮ïŒäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ãåºå°å±è£ 眮è¥ããã¯åºå°å±è£ 眮ã®ããã®ã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ãåã¯ã端æ«è£ 眮è¥ããã¯ç«¯æ«è£ 眮ã®ããã®ã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ïŒã«åããããããã»ããµïŒäŸãã°ãããªã©ïŒãäžèšè£ çœ®ã®æ§æèŠçŽ ïŒäŸãã°ãåæ¿éšåã³ïŒè¥ããã¯å¶åŸ¡éšãåã¯ãæ å ±ååŸéšåã³ïŒè¥ããã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒãšããŠæ©èœãããããã®ã³ã³ãã¥ãŒã¿ããã°ã©ã ïŒæèšãããšãäžèšããã»ããµã«äžèšè£ çœ®ã®æ§æèŠçŽ ã®åäœãå®è¡ãããããã®ã³ã³ãã¥ãŒã¿ããã°ã©ã ïŒãäœæå¯èœã§ããããŸããåœè©²ã³ã³ãã¥ãŒã¿ããã°ã©ã ãèšé²ããèšé²åªäœãæäŸãããŠãããããŸããäžèšã³ã³ãã¥ãŒã¿ããã°ã©ã ãèšæ¶ããã¡ã¢ãªãšãäžèšã³ã³ãã¥ãŒã¿ããã°ã©ã ãå®è¡å¯èœãªïŒã€ä»¥äžã®ããã»ããµãšãåããè£ çœ®ïŒäŸãã°ãåºå°å±ãåºå°å±è£ 眮è¥ããã¯åºå°å±è£ 眮ã®ããã®ã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ãåã¯ã端æ«è£ 眮è¥ããã¯ç«¯æ«è£ 眮ã®ããã®ã¢ãžã¥ãŒã«ïŒãæäŸãããŠãããããŸããäžèšè£ çœ®ã®æ§æèŠçŽ ïŒäŸãã°ãåæ¿éšåã³ïŒè¥ããã¯å¶åŸ¡éšãåã¯ãæ å ±ååŸéšåã³ïŒè¥ããã¯å¶åŸ¡éšïŒã®åäœãå«ãæ¹æ³ããæ¬é瀺ã«ä¿ãæè¡ã«å«ãŸããã In addition, a processor (for example, a CPU, a DSP, or the like) provided in a device of the present specification (for example, a base station, a base station device, a module for a base station device, or a terminal device or a module for a terminal device) A computer program for functioning as a component of the device (for example, a switching unit and / or a control unit, or an information acquisition unit and / or a control unit) (in other words, the processor executes the operation of the component of the device) A computer program) can be created. Moreover, a recording medium on which the computer program is recorded may be provided. An apparatus (for example, a base station, a base station apparatus, a module for a base station apparatus, a terminal apparatus, or a device including a memory for storing the computer program and one or more processors capable of executing the computer program) A module for a terminal device may also be provided. In addition, a method including the operation of the components of the device (for example, the switching unit and / or the control unit or the information acquisition unit and / or the control unit) is also included in the technology according to the present disclosure.
ããŸããæ¬æçްæžã«èšèŒããã广ã¯ããããŸã§èª¬æçåã¯äŸç€ºçãªãã®ã§ãã£ãŠéå®çã§ã¯ãªããã€ãŸããæ¬é瀺ã«ä¿ãæè¡ã¯ãäžèšå¹æãšãšãã«ãåã¯äžèšå¹æã«ä»£ããŠãæ¬æçŽ°æžã®èšèŒããåœæ¥è ã«ã¯æãããªä»ã®å¹æãå¥ãããã In addition, the effects described in the present specification are merely illustrative or illustrative, and are not limited. That is, the technology according to the present disclosure can exhibit other effects that are apparent to those skilled in the art from the description of the present specification in addition to or instead of the above effects.
ããªãã以äžã®ãããªæ§æãæ¬éç€ºã®æè¡çç¯å²ã«å±ããã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãïŒFrequencyãDivisionãDuplexïŒã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããåæ¿éšãšã
ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãåã³ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ãå¶åŸ¡éšãšã
ãåããè£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®åèšæç€ºãåã³åèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®åèšæç€ºãè¡ããåèšïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®åèšæç€ºãåã³åèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®åèšæç€ºã¯ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããµããŒãããåäžã®ç«¯æ«è£
眮ãžã®æç€ºã§ãããåèšïŒïŒïŒåã¯ïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã³ãã³ãã®éç¥ã«ãããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®åèšæç€ºãåã³åèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®åèšæç€ºãè¡ããåèšïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã³ãã³ãã¯ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã®ããã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã³ãã³ããšãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã®ããã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã³ãã³ããšãå«ããåèšïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã®ããã®åèšã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã³ãã³ãã¯ã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã°ã«ãŒãã®ããã®ã³ãã³ãã§ããã
ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã®ããã®åèšã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã³ãã³ãã¯ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã°ã«ãŒããšã¯ç°ãªã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã°ã«ãŒãã®ããã®ã³ãã³ãã§ããã
åèšïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã³ãã³ãã®éç¥ã«ãããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹åã³åèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã®ãã¡ã®äžæ¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ãšåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ãšã®éã®ãªãã»ããã瀺ãæ
å ±ã®éç¥ã«ãããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹åã³åèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã®ãã¡ã®ä»æ¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ããåèšïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã®ããããïŒé
ã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®åèšæç€ºã¯ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããµããŒãããªã第ïŒã®ç«¯æ«è£
眮ãžã®æç€ºã§ããã
ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®åèšæç€ºã¯ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããµããŒããã第ïŒã®ç«¯æ«è£
眮ãžã®æç€ºã§ããã
åèšïŒïŒïŒåã¯ïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ç«¯æ«è£
眮ã¯ãåèšããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«åºã¥ããŠåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽãã端æ«è£
眮ã§ããã
ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ç«¯æ«è£
眮ã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«åºã¥ããŠåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽãã端æ«è£
眮ã§ããã
åèšïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããåæä¿¡å·ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã®ããããïŒé
ã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã¯ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšãããäžã€ãç¡ç·ãã¬ãŒã ã®ãã¡ã®å°ãªããšãæå®ã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ãããŠåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšãããã¢ãŒãã§ããã
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãç¡ç·ãã¬ãŒã ã®ãã¡ã®åèšæå®ã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ãããŠåèšåæä¿¡å·ãéä¿¡ãããããã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããåèšåæä¿¡å·ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãã
åèšïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããåæ¿éšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåæãããå¶åŸ¡éšãšã
ãåããè£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãå°ãªããšãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããæå®æéã ãæ©ããåèšïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšæå®æéã¯ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ãžã®åæ¿ãã«èŠããæéã§ãããåèšïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšåæããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãããåèšæå®æéã ãæ©ãã
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããžã®åèšåäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã«å¿ããŠåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ãåèšæå®æéã ãé·ããªãããã«ãåœè©²ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ãã
åèšïŒïŒïŒïŒåã¯ïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšåæ¿ãã®ïŒãµããã¬ãŒã åã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã«ãããã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã³ãã³ãã®éç¥ã«ãããåèšã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®åèšæç€ºãè¡ããåèšïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšæå®æéã«å¯Ÿå¿ãããªãã»ããã瀺ãæ
å ±ã®éç¥ã«ãããåèšã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®åèšæç€ºãè¡ããåèšïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãã£ãŠããåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããŠåæä¿¡å·ã¯éä¿¡ãããªããåèšïŒïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ããããïŒé
ã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãã端æ«è£
眮ã«éç¥ãããåèšïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ããããïŒé
ã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããååŸéšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãå¶åŸ¡éšãšã
ãåãã
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããåã¯åèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããã«ããããåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã
è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãããã»ããµã«ããã
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããããšãšã
ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãåã³ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ãããšãšã
ãå«ãæ¹æ³ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããããšãšã
ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãåã³ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ãããšãšã
ãããã»ããµã«å®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããããšãšã
ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãåã³ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã«ã€ããŠã®æç€ºãè¡ãããšãšã
ãããã»ããµã«å®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãèšé²ããèªã¿åãå¯èœãªèšé²åªäœã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãããã»ããµã«ããã
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåæãããããšãšã
ãå«ãæ¹æ³ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåæãããããšãšã
ãããã»ããµã«å®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåæãããããšãšã
ãããã»ããµã«å®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãèšé²ããèªã¿åãå¯èœãªèšé²åªäœã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãããã»ããµã«ããã
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããåã¯åèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããã«ããããåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããšãšã
ãå«ãæ¹æ³ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããåã¯åèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããã«ããããåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããšãšã
ãããã»ããµã«å®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããåã¯åèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ãããã«ããããåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããšãšã
ãããã»ããµã«å®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãèšé²ããèªã¿åãå¯èœãªèšé²åªäœã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããååŸéšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãå¶åŸ¡éšãšã
ãåãã
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããåã¯ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåœè©²ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã
è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãããã»ããµã«ããã
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããåã¯ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåœè©²ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããšãšã
ãå«ãæ¹æ³ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããåã¯ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåœè©²ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããšãšã
ãããã»ããµã«å®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããåã¯ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåœè©²ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšãã第ïŒã®ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããšãšã
ãããã»ããµã«å®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãèšé²ããèªã¿åãå¯èœãªèšé²åªäœã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããååŸéšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãå¶åŸ¡éšãšã
ãåãã
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåœè©²ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããã
è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãããã»ããµã«ããã
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåœè©²ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããšãšã
ãå«ãæ¹æ³ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåœè©²ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããšãšã
ãããã»ããµã«å®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãšãåœè©²ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åœè©²ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ãåºæºãšããã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã¢ããã³ã¹ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãšã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã¿ã€ãã³ã°ã調æŽããããšãšã
ãããã»ããµã«å®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãèšé²ããèªã¿åãå¯èœãªèšé²åªäœã
The following configurations also belong to the technical scope of the present disclosure.
(1)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD (Frequency Division Duplex) is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division. A switching unit for switching an operation mode for the uplink band;
An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band A control unit for instructing timing advance;
A device comprising:
(2)
The control unit performs the instruction for the first timing advance and the instruction for the second timing advance when the operation mode is the second mode. Equipment.
(3)
(1) or (2), wherein the instruction for the first timing advance and the instruction for the second timing advance are instructions to the same terminal device that supports the second mode. The device described in 1.
(4)
The apparatus according to (3), wherein the control unit performs the instruction for the first timing advance and the instruction for the second timing advance in response to a notification of a timing advance command.
(5)
The apparatus according to (4), wherein the timing advance command includes a timing advance command for the first timing advance and a timing advance command for the second timing advance.
(6)
The timing advance command for the first timing advance is a command for a first timing advance group;
The timing advance command for the second timing advance is a command for a second timing advance group different from the first timing advance group.
The apparatus according to (5) above.
(7)
The control unit gives an instruction for one of the first timing advance and the second timing advance in response to the notification of the timing advance command, and the first timing advance and the second timing advance The apparatus according to any one of (3) to (6), wherein an instruction for the other of the first timing advance and the second timing advance is given by notification of information indicating an offset between the first timing advance and the second timing advance .
(8)
The instruction for the first timing advance is an instruction to a first terminal device that does not support the second mode;
The instruction for the second timing advance is an instruction to a second terminal device that supports the second mode.
The apparatus according to (1) or (2).
(9)
The first terminal device is a terminal device that adjusts uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on downlink reception timing for the downlink band,
The second terminal apparatus adjusts an uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode. Is,
The apparatus according to (8) above.
(10)
The control unit according to any one of (1) to (9), wherein when the operation mode is the second mode, the control unit performs a process for transmitting a synchronization signal in the uplink band. Equipment.
(11)
In the second mode, the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, and the uplink band is used for the downlink in at least a predetermined subframe of the radio frame. Mode
The control unit transmits the synchronization signal in the uplink band so that the synchronization signal is transmitted in the predetermined subframe of a radio frame when the operation mode is the second mode. Do the processing for,
The apparatus according to (10) above.
(12)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band A switching unit for switching the operation mode for
When the operation mode is the second mode, a control unit that synchronizes the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band When,
A device comprising:
(13)
The uplink reception timing for the uplink band is at least a predetermined time earlier than the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band when at least the operation mode is the second mode. Equipment.
(14)
The apparatus according to (13), wherein the predetermined time is a time required for switching from the uplink to the downlink in the uplink band.
(15)
The uplink reception timing for the uplink band is synchronized with the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band when the operation mode is the first mode, and the operation mode is the second mode. In some cases, the predetermined time earlier than the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band,
The control unit may increase the timing advance of uplink transmission in the uplink band by the predetermined time in response to the switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode. Give instructions about the
The device according to (13) or (14).
(16)
The apparatus according to (15), wherein the control unit issues the instruction regarding the timing advance by notification of a timing advance command in a subframe six subframes before the switching.
(17)
The apparatus according to (15), wherein the control unit issues the instruction regarding the timing advance by notification of information indicating an offset corresponding to the predetermined time.
(18)
The apparatus according to any one of (12) to (17), wherein a synchronization signal is not transmitted in the uplink band even when the operation mode is the second mode.
(19)
The device according to any one of (1) to (18), wherein the control unit notifies the terminal device of information indicating an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band.
(20)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission;
With
The control unit is based on a downlink reception timing for a FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode. Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band,
apparatus.
(21)
Depending on the processor
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band Giving instructions about timing advance,
Including methods.
(22)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band Giving instructions about timing advance,
A program that causes a processor to execute.
(23)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band Giving instructions about timing advance,
A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
(24)
Depending on the processor
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
Synchronizing the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode; ,
Including methods.
(25)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
Synchronizing the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode; ,
A program that causes a processor to execute.
(26)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
Synchronizing the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode; ,
A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
(27)
Depending on the processor
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
Regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode, the uplink is based on the downlink reception timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band. Adjusting the uplink transmission timing for the bandwidth,
Including methods.
(28)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
Regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode, the uplink is based on the downlink reception timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band. Adjusting the uplink transmission timing for the bandwidth,
A program that causes a processor to execute.
(29)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
Regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode, the uplink is based on the downlink reception timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band. Adjusting the uplink transmission timing for the bandwidth,
A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
(30)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission;
With
The control unit, when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band On the basis of the information indicating the first timing advance based on the uplink transmission timing for the uplink band, or the downlink reception timing for the uplink band and the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on information indicating a second timing advance based on the downlink reception timing;
apparatus.
(31)
Depending on the processor
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
When the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band are used as a reference. The uplink transmission timing for the uplink band is adjusted based on the information indicating one timing advance, or the downlink reception timing for the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on information indicating a second timing advance based on
Including methods.
(32)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
When the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band are used as a reference. The uplink transmission timing for the uplink band is adjusted based on the information indicating one timing advance, or the downlink reception timing for the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on information indicating a second timing advance based on
A program that causes a processor to execute.
(33)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
When the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band are used as a reference. The uplink transmission timing for the uplink band is adjusted based on the information indicating one timing advance, or the downlink reception timing for the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on information indicating a second timing advance based on
A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
(34)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission;
With
The control unit indicates a downlink advance timing for the uplink band and a timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode. Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on the information,
apparatus.
(35)
Depending on the processor
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
When the operation mode is the second mode, based on downlink reception timing for the uplink band and information indicating timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink bandwidth;
Including methods.
(36)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
When the operation mode is the second mode, based on downlink reception timing for the uplink band and information indicating timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink bandwidth;
A program that causes a processor to execute.
(37)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
When the operation mode is the second mode, based on downlink reception timing for the uplink band and information indicating timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink bandwidth;
A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
ããŸãã以äžã®ãããªæ§æãæ¬éç€ºã®æè¡çç¯å²ã«å±ããã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãïŒFrequencyãDivisionãDuplexïŒã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããåæ¿éšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒAcknowledgementïŒïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒNegativeãAcknowledgementïŒãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ãã端æ«è£
眮ã«éç¥ããå¶åŸ¡éšãšã
ãåããè£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã¯ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ãå«ããåèšïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã¯ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ãããã«å«ããåèšïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ããè€æ°ã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®äžã§å€æŽãã
ãåèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãåèšè€æ°ã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®éã§å
±éã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããã
åèšïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã®ããããïŒé
ã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãåèšè€æ°ã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®ãã¡ã®ç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®ããã«å®çŸ©ããããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡çšã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããã
ãåèšæ
å ±ã¯ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã瀺ãæ
å ±ã§ããã
åèšïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ãåèšè€æ°ã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®ãã¡ã®ãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ãµããã¬ãŒã ã®æ°ãæå°ã§ããã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã§ãããåèšïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããä»ã®æ
å ±ãã端æ«è£
眮ã«éç¥ãããåèšïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒã®ããããïŒé
ã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã¯ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã§ãããåèšïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ããè€æ°ã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®äžã§å€æŽãã
ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããåèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãåèšè€æ°ã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®éã§å
±éã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããã
åèšïŒïŒïŒåã¯ïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããåèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãåèšè€æ°ã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®ãã¡ã®ç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®ããã«å®çŸ©ããããã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡çšã®ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããã
ãåèšä»ã®æ
å ±ã¯ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã瀺ãæ
å ±ã§ããã
åèšïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã¯ãåèšè€æ°ã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®ãã¡ã®ãããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ãµããã¬ãŒã ã®æ°ãæå°ã§ããã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã§ãããåèšïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåå¥ã®ã·ã°ããªã³ã°ã«ãããåèšæ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ã«éç¥ãããåèšïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ããããïŒé
ã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãã·ã¹ãã æ
å ±ã®äžã§ãåèšæ
å ±ã端æ«è£
眮ã«éç¥ãããåèšïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ããããïŒé
ã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³ã瀺ãæ
å ±ãã端æ«è£
眮ã«éç¥ãããåèšïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ããããïŒé
ã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãããã»ããµã«ããã
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ãã端æ«è£
眮ã«éç¥ããããšãšã
ãå«ãæ¹æ³ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããååŸéšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãå¶åŸ¡éšãšã
ãåãã
ãåèšååŸéšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ãååŸãã
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããåèšæ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãã
è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã¯ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«å¯Ÿå¿ããã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ãå«ããåèšïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã¯ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããŠéä¿¡ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ãããã«å«ããåèšïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšååŸéšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããä»ã®æ
å ±ãååŸãã
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããåèšä»ã®æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®åä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãã
åèšïŒïŒïŒïŒïœïŒïŒïŒïŒã®ããããïŒé
ã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããåèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®è€æ°ã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®éã§å
±éã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããã
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšä»ã®æ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®æž¬å®ãå¶åŸ¡ããã
åèšïŒïŒïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£
眮ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ãã端æ«è£
眮ã«éç¥ããããšãšã
ãããã»ããµã«å®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ãã端æ«è£
眮ã«éç¥ããããšãšã
ãããã»ããµã«å®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãèšé²ããèªã¿åãå¯èœãªèšé²åªäœã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãããã»ããµã«ããã
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããåèšæ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãå«ãæ¹æ³ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããåèšæ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãããã»ããµã«å®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ã
ïŒïŒïŒïŒ
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ã®ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒãã®åæ¿ãã瀺ãæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ
å ±ãååŸããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããåèšæ
å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãããšãšã
ãããã»ããµã«å®è¡ãããããã®ããã°ã©ã ãèšé²ããèªã¿åãå¯èœãªèšé²åªäœã
The following configurations also belong to the technical scope of the present disclosure.
(1)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD (Frequency Division Duplex) is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division. A switching unit for switching an operation mode for the uplink band;
A control unit for notifying a terminal device of information on a subframe for transmitting ACK (Acknowledgement) / NACK (Negative Acknowledgement) for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
A device comprising:
(2)
The apparatus according to (1), wherein the downlink data includes downlink data transmitted in a downlink band of FDD corresponding to the uplink band.
(3)
The apparatus according to (2), wherein the downlink data further includes downlink data transmitted in the uplink band.
(4)
The control unit changes an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates when the operation mode is the second mode,
The subframe is an uplink subframe common among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
The apparatus according to any one of (1) to (3).
(5)
The subframe is a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data defined for a first uplink / downlink configuration candidate of the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates. Frame,
The information is information indicating the first uplink / downlink configuration candidate.
The apparatus according to (4) above.
(6)
The first uplink / downlink configuration candidate is an uplink / downlink configuration candidate having a minimum number of uplink subframes among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates. The apparatus according to (5) above.
(7)
The control unit notifies the terminal device of other information related to a subframe in which ACK / NACK for uplink data is transmitted when the operation mode is the second mode, (1) to (6) The apparatus according to any one of (1).
(8)
The apparatus according to (7), wherein the uplink data is uplink data transmitted in the uplink band.
(9)
The control unit changes an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates when the operation mode is the second mode,
The subframe transmitting ACK / NACK for the uplink data is a downlink subframe common among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
The apparatus according to (7) or (8).
(10)
The subframe transmitting an ACK / NACK for the uplink data is defined as an uplink defined for a second uplink / downlink configuration candidate among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates. ACK / NACK subframe for link data,
The other information is information indicating the second uplink / downlink configuration candidate.
The apparatus according to (9) above.
(11)
The second uplink / downlink configuration candidate is an uplink / downlink configuration candidate having a minimum number of downlink subframes among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates. The apparatus according to (10) above.
(12)
The device according to any one of (1) to (11), wherein the control unit notifies the terminal device of the information by individual signaling.
(13)
The device according to any one of (1) to (12), wherein the control unit notifies the terminal device of the information in the system information.
(14)
The apparatus according to any one of (1) to (13), wherein the control unit notifies the terminal apparatus of information indicating an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band.
(15)
Depending on the processor
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
Notifying the terminal device of information regarding subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
Including methods.
(16)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission;
With
The acquisition unit acquires information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode,
The control unit performs processing for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data based on the information on the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode.
apparatus.
(17)
The apparatus according to (16), wherein the downlink data includes downlink data transmitted in a downlink band of an FDD corresponding to the uplink band.
(18)
The apparatus according to (17), wherein the downlink data further includes downlink data transmitted in the uplink band.
(19)
The acquisition unit acquires other information related to a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for uplink data when the operation mode is the second mode,
The control unit performs processing for reception of ACK / NACK for uplink data based on the other information regarding the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode.
The apparatus according to any one of (16) to (18).
(20)
The subframe transmitting ACK / NACK for the uplink data is a downlink subframe common among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates for the uplink band;
The control unit controls measurement of the uplink band based on the other information;
The apparatus according to (19) above.
(21)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
Notifying the terminal device of information regarding subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
A program that causes a processor to execute.
(22)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
Notifying the terminal device of information regarding subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
(23)
Depending on the processor
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
Obtaining information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
Performing a process for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data based on the information on the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode;
Including methods.
(24)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
Obtaining information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
Performing a process for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data based on the information on the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode;
A program that causes a processor to execute.
(25)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
Obtaining information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
Performing a process for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data based on the information on the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode;
A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
ãïŒããããã·ã¹ãã
ãïŒïŒïŒããåºå°å±
ãïŒïŒïŒããåæ¿éš
ãïŒïŒïŒããå¶åŸ¡éš
ãïŒïŒïŒããåºå°å±
ãïŒïŒïŒããæ
å ±ååŸéš
ãïŒïŒïŒããå¶åŸ¡éš
1
Claims (20)
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒAcknowledgementïŒïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒNegativeãAcknowledgementïŒãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ å ±ãã端æ«è£ 眮ã«éç¥ããå¶åŸ¡éšãšã
ãåããè£ çœ®ã Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD (Frequency Division Duplex) is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division. A switching unit for switching an operation mode for the uplink band;
A control unit for notifying a terminal device of information on a subframe for transmitting ACK (Acknowledgement) / NACK (Negative Acknowledgement) for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
A device comprising:
ãåèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãåèšè€æ°ã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®éã§å ±éã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããã
è«æ±é ïŒã«èšèŒã®è£ 眮ã The control unit changes an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates when the operation mode is the second mode,
The subframe is an uplink subframe common among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
The apparatus of claim 1.
ãåèšæ å ±ã¯ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ãç€ºãæ å ±ã§ããã
è«æ±é ïŒã«èšèŒã®è£ 眮ã The subframe is a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data defined for a first uplink / downlink configuration candidate of the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates. Frame,
The information is information indicating the first uplink / downlink configuration candidate.
The apparatus according to claim 4.
ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ããåèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã¯ãåèšè€æ°ã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ã®éã§å ±éã®ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ãµããã¬ãŒã ã§ããã
è«æ±é ïŒã«èšèŒã®è£ 眮ã The control unit changes an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates when the operation mode is the second mode,
The subframe transmitting ACK / NACK for the uplink data is a downlink subframe common among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
The apparatus according to claim 7.
ãåèšä»ã®æ å ±ã¯ãåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ïŒããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ã³ã³ãã£ã®ã¥ã¬ãŒã·ã§ã³åè£ãç€ºãæ å ±ã§ããã
è«æ±é ïŒã«èšèŒã®è£ 眮ã The subframe transmitting an ACK / NACK for the uplink data is defined as an uplink defined for a second uplink / downlink configuration candidate among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates. ACK / NACK subframe for link data,
The other information is information indicating the second uplink / downlink configuration candidate.
The apparatus according to claim 9.
ãã®ã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åãæåå²ã«ããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯ã®äž¡æ¹ã«äœ¿çšããã第ïŒã®ã¢ãŒããšã®éã§ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®åäœã¢ãŒããåãæ¿ããããšãšã
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ å ±ãã端æ«è£ 眮ã«éç¥ããããšãšã
ãå«ãæ¹æ³ã Depending on the processor
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
Notifying the terminal device of information regarding subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
Including methods.
ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ããåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ãããããŠã³ãªã³ã¯åä¿¡åã³ã¢ãããªã³ã¯éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãå¶åŸ¡éšãšã
ãåãã
ãåèšååŸéšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ãéä¿¡ãããµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããæ å ±ãååŸãã
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããåèšæ å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãããŠã³ãªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®éä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãã
è£ çœ®ã The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission;
With
The acquisition unit acquires information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode,
The control unit performs processing for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data based on the information on the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode.
apparatus.
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšåäœã¢ãŒããåèšç¬¬ïŒã®ã¢ãŒãã§ããå Žåã«ãåèšãµããã¬ãŒã ã«é¢ããåèšä»ã®æ å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãã¢ãããªã³ã¯ããŒã¿ã«ã€ããŠã®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ïŒïŒ®ïŒ¡ïŒ£ïŒ«ã®åä¿¡ã®ããã®åŠçãè¡ãã
è«æ±é ïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£ 眮ã The acquisition unit acquires other information related to a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for uplink data when the operation mode is the second mode,
The control unit performs processing for reception of ACK / NACK for uplink data based on the other information regarding the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode.
The apparatus of claim 16.
ãåèšå¶åŸ¡éšã¯ãåèšä»ã®æ å ±ã«åºã¥ããŠãåèšã¢ãããªã³ã¯åž¯åã«ã€ããŠã®æž¬å®ãå¶åŸ¡ããã
è«æ±é ïŒïŒã«èšèŒã®è£ 眮ã The subframe transmitting ACK / NACK for the uplink data is a downlink subframe common among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates for the uplink band;
The control unit controls measurement of the uplink band based on the other information;
The apparatus of claim 19.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2014-251663 | 2014-12-12 | ||
| JP2014251663 | 2014-12-12 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2016092953A1 true WO2016092953A1 (en) | 2016-06-16 |
Family
ID=56107148
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/JP2015/079223 Ceased WO2016092953A1 (en) | 2014-12-12 | 2015-10-15 | Device |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2016092953A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN111788858A (en) * | 2018-02-23 | 2020-10-16 | äžæçµåæ ªåŒäŒç€Ÿ | Method and apparatus for retransmitting uplink data configured in discontinuous reception in a wireless communication system |
Citations (2)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2002345014A (en) * | 2001-05-16 | 2002-11-29 | Ntt Docomo Inc | Mobile communication system |
| WO2013192601A2 (en) * | 2012-06-22 | 2013-12-27 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Data transmission in carrier aggregation with different carrier configurations |
-
2015
- 2015-10-15 WO PCT/JP2015/079223 patent/WO2016092953A1/en not_active Ceased
Patent Citations (2)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2002345014A (en) * | 2001-05-16 | 2002-11-29 | Ntt Docomo Inc | Mobile communication system |
| WO2013192601A2 (en) * | 2012-06-22 | 2013-12-27 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Data transmission in carrier aggregation with different carrier configurations |
Non-Patent Citations (3)
| Title |
|---|
| ETRI: "Remaining issues for TDD-FDD CA", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG1#76B R1-141265, 31 March 2014 (2014-03-31) * |
| IAESI: "Scenarios of TDD-FDD joint operation in the same frequency band", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG1#74 RL-133217, 19 August 2013 (2013-08-19) * |
| LEI WAN ET AL., 2013 IEEE, pages 49 - 54 * |
Cited By (3)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN111788858A (en) * | 2018-02-23 | 2020-10-16 | äžæçµåæ ªåŒäŒç€Ÿ | Method and apparatus for retransmitting uplink data configured in discontinuous reception in a wireless communication system |
| US11844137B2 (en) | 2018-02-23 | 2023-12-12 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for retransmitting uplink data configured in discontinuous reception in a wireless communication system |
| CN111788858B (en) * | 2018-02-23 | 2024-05-31 | äžæçµåæ ªåŒäŒç€Ÿ | Method and apparatus for retransmitting uplink data configured in discontinuous reception in a wireless communication system |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US20220408298A1 (en) | Electronic device and method for wireless communications | |
| JP6617717B2 (en) | apparatus | |
| JP6432655B2 (en) | COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM | |
| CN105993201B (en) | Communication device and method | |
| JP6194896B2 (en) | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND PROGRAM | |
| US20200275500A1 (en) | Device and method | |
| WO2016163206A1 (en) | Terminal device, wireless communication device, wireless communication method, and computer program | |
| JP7268955B2 (en) | Terminal device, communication method, and program | |
| KR20210108960A (en) | Electronic devices and methods used for wireless communication, and computer-readable storage media | |
| WO2020144973A1 (en) | Communication device, communication method, and program | |
| WO2018128029A1 (en) | Terminal device, base station device, method and recording medium | |
| JP6265204B2 (en) | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND TERMINAL DEVICE | |
| WO2014132515A1 (en) | User equipment, program, and communication control method | |
| JP6209898B2 (en) | COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND TERMINAL DEVICE | |
| US20230046108A1 (en) | Electronic device and method for wireless communication, and computer-readable storage medium | |
| US10028256B2 (en) | Apparatus | |
| WO2016092953A1 (en) | Device | |
| WO2017038192A1 (en) | Apparatus and method | |
| KR20220083682A (en) | Electronic device and method for wireless communication, and computer-readable storage medium |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 15868642 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 15868642 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: JP |